JP2017006502A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of facilitating a confirmation of data information managed by a real-time clock.SOLUTION: There is provided a game machine performing a game on the basis of an establishment of a prescribed condition, and capable of performing a special game advantageous to a player, if a result of the game becomes a prescribed result, the game machine including: clocking means for generating information indicating a present date; clocking information acquisition means (a presentation control device) for acquiring information generated by the clocking means; and clocking information output means (the presentation control device) for performing an output corresponding to information which is acquired by the clocking information acquisition means from the clocking means, on the basis of an activation of power supply to the game machine.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 112

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and executing a special game advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a predetermined result.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) displayed on the variable display device provided in the game area based on the winning of the game ball at the start opening provided in the game area (start prize) ) Is displayed in a variable manner, and when a plurality of pieces of identification information that have been stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time are in a special result mode determined in advance, a special payout of a lot of prize balls to the player Some players enter a gaming state and the player earns a lot of profit. In this kind of pachinko machine, one having a real-time clock for managing the actual date and time has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-144020 A

  However, there are many gaming machines in the game store, and it takes a lot of labor and time to operate each gaming machine in order to confirm the date and time information managed by the real-time clock. An object of the present invention is to facilitate confirmation of date and time information managed by a real-time clock.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and can execute a special game advantageous to a player when the result of the game becomes a predetermined result,
A timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time;
Timing information acquisition means for acquiring information generated by the timing means;
The time information acquisition means includes a time information output means for performing output corresponding to the information acquired from the time measurement means based on power-on to the gaming machine.

  Here, the output corresponding to the information acquired from the time measuring means includes sound, display on a display device, display by a lamp or LED, output to a device outside the gaming machine, and the like.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, since output corresponding to information acquired from the time measuring means (real time clock) is performed based on power-on, it is easy to confirm date and time information managed by the time measuring means.

The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
Provided with a display device capable of displaying the effect display related to the game
The timekeeping information output means includes
The time information acquisition unit displays a display corresponding to the information acquired from the time unit on the display device.

  According to the second aspect of the present invention, since the display corresponding to the information acquired from the time measuring means is performed based on the power-on, it is easy to check the date information managed by the time measuring means.

The invention according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
It has a speaker that can output audio related to gaming,
The timekeeping information output means includes
The time information acquisition unit outputs sound corresponding to the information acquired from the time unit from the speaker.

  According to the third aspect of the invention, since the sound corresponding to the information acquired from the time measuring means is output when the power is turned on, it is easy to confirm the date and time information managed by the time measuring means.

  According to the present invention, it becomes easy to confirm the date and time information managed by the time measuring means.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure showing a board production device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a figure which shows an example of the bit transposition pattern of a random number. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1). It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 2). It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. It is a flowchart explaining a time shortening fluctuation frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 2 (at the time end of time reduction). It is a figure explaining an upper university winning opening opening / closing pattern. It is a figure explaining a lower big prize opening opening / closing pattern. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a solenoid information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 3 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a normal process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric power remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining an end process per common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port signal edit process. It is a figure which shows the main functions of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control apparatus. It is a figure explaining the determination and initialization process of specific information. It is a flowchart explaining a hall | game player setting mode process. It is a flowchart explaining a model switching process. It is a figure explaining the setting information of a model. It is a figure explaining the kind and arrangement | sequence of a symbol. It is a figure explaining a variation pattern selection table group. It is a figure explaining a variation pattern table group. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the notice lottery process during the first half change. It is a flowchart explaining the notice lottery process during the latter half change. It is a flowchart explaining a production mode management process. It is a figure explaining model contents change conditions. It is a figure explaining the table for selecting a notice. It is a figure explaining the detail of a fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure explaining the example of a display regarding change of an effect mode. It is a flowchart explaining backup type command processing. It is a figure explaining an example of a transition of data in backup type command processing, and a command. It is a figure explaining the transition of the data in single-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a RTC check process. It is a figure explaining the display at the time of power activation. It is a figure explaining another example of the display at the time of power activation. It is a figure explaining another example of the display at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart explaining a preliminary announcement detailed lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in the production | presentation control apparatus in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit system command processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the model switching process in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining transition of model change setting information in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the production mode management process in a 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the model contents change conditions in the 3rd modification. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the rotation display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the rotation display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect seen from the front of the rotation display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect seen from the side of the rotation display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the detection state in the 1st motor switch sensor and the 2nd motor switch sensor in the rotation display device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the model switching process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the hall | game / player setting mode process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the content cancellation | release process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display content with the display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the notice detailed lottery process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effective period of the production button in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the RTC check process in the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the RTC check process in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the simultaneous production process in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 through a hinge 13 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body) 12.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for paying out abnormality notification are provided in the upper part of the glass frame 15. Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 with a built-in lamp and the like for emitting light for decoration and production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Yes. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

  Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 is provided on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21. The effect button 25 forms an operation means with a built-in operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card is discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). it can.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and is formed to protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, a board production device 44 (production operation device) is provided on the upper portion of the center case 40 to produce a game effect by operating. The board effect device 44 includes a triangular prism-shaped rotating member 44a as shown in FIG. 3A and a drive source for operating the rotating member 44a. A rotating shaft 44b extending along the extending direction of the rotating member 44a is provided on the left and right end faces of the rotating member 44a, and the rotating shaft 44b is supported so as to be rotatable along the left and right direction. 44 a is arranged to be rotatable with respect to the center case 40. Further, the rotary member 44a can be rotated by rotating the rotary shaft 44b with a drive source, whereby the side surface of the rotary member 44a that can be visually recognized by the player can be changed.

  Character information relating to the game as shown in FIGS. 3B to 3D is described on each side surface of the rotating member 44a. As will be described later, the gaming machine of this embodiment is configured so that the model can be changed. As shown in FIG. 3B, the letters “ABC”, which is the first model name, are displayed on one side. As shown in FIG. 3C, the letters “Iroha”, which is the second model name, are described on another side. Further, as shown in FIG. 3 (d), the letters “CHANCE” indicating that there is a high possibility of a big hit are described on another aspect.

  Returning to FIG. 2, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided on the left and right sides of the center case 40 in the game area 32. Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 4).

  Also, below the center case 40, there is provided a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure variation display game. The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 4). The start winning opening 36 is provided with a pair of movable members 37b and 37b that can be converted to a state in which a game ball can easily flow into the upper portion by opening it in the shape of a reverse “C” at the top, and a second start winning opening ( An ordinary variable winning device (Fuden) 37 having a starting winning area is provided.

  The pair of movable members 37b, 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 always holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the start winning port 36 is provided above the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state. Then, when the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is opened in a reverse “C” shape by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 4) as a drive device, and a normal variation prize is won. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows. The game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 4). It should be noted that a game ball can be won even in the closed state, and in the closed state, the game ball may be harder to win than in the open state.

  Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, a first special variable winning device (first big prize opening, lower large size) which can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure display game. (Winning opening) 38 is arranged.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is changed from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to the open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning solenoid 38b (see FIG. 4) as a driving device, and during the special gaming state, By converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. Note that a lower count switch 38a (see FIG. 4) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening is disposed inside the big prize opening (winning area). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two lower count switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the big prize opening is detected by one of the lower count switches 38a. By providing a plurality of lower count switches 38a as described above, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening. Further, below the first special variable winning device 38, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  Also, in the upper left part of the center case 40, a second special variable winning device (second big prize opening, upper big prize winning) that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 39) is provided. Similarly to the first special variable prize-winning device 38, the second special variable prize-winning device 39 also has an attacker-type opening / closing door (movable member) 39c that can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side. Depending on the result of the special-figure display game as an auxiliary game, the big prize opening is converted from a closed state (blocked state unfavorable for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable prize winning device 39 includes, for example, a big prize opening opened and closed by an open / close door 39c driven by a big prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 4) as a driving device. By converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. Note that an upper count switch 39a (see FIG. 4) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is disposed inside the special winning opening (winning area). In the special game state, one of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is released, and which one is released is determined by the result mode (special result) of the special figure variable display game. Is done.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 which form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display part (general figure display) 53 for the common figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the LED lamp Storage display units 54, 55, and 56 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game. Further, the collective display device 50 is turned on when a big hit occurs and a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator) 57 that notifies the occurrence of the big hit, and lights up when a short time state occurs to notify the occurrence of a short time state. A second gaming state display unit (second gaming state indicator) 58, and a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state) for displaying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. A status display (probability status display section) 59 and a round display section 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) are provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. When the result of the game is “out of place”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result form of out of play. A game result is displayed with a result form (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result form turned on.

  The normal display 53 displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the game result after a predetermined time, by blinking the lamp during the change and displaying the change. Further, the general figure hold display 56 displays the start memory number (= holding number) of the general figure start gate 34, which is the variation start condition of the general display, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of LEDs. For example, when the hold number is “0”, the lamps 1 to 3 are turned off, and when the hold number is “1”, only the lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of holdings is “2”, only the lamp 2 is turned on, and when the number of holdings is “3”, only the lamp 3 is turned on. When the number of hold is “4”, all the lamps 1 to 3 are turned on.

  The special figure 1 holding display 54 indicates the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking and lighting. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 indicates the start memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting. Here, the number of starting memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 in the same lighting manner as the ordinary figure hold indicator 56.

  For example, the first gaming state display unit 57 turns off the lamp in a normal gaming state and turns on the lamp when a big hit has occurred. For example, the second gaming state display unit 58 turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp when the short time state occurs.

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 turns off the lamp when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, for example. If the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

  For example, the round display unit 60 turns off the lamp when not in the special gaming state, and turns on the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special gaming state. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 are won, or they flow into the outlet 30 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and are discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38, 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is changed to the payout control device. From the dispensing unit controlled by 200 (see FIG. 4), the sheet is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the front frame 12.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The memorized number of the usual figure start winnings is displayed on the universal figure holding display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (win random number value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal chart start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual figure change display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a change display portion (common figure display) 53 constituted by LEDs. Makes identification information (general, normal). The general map display 53 is composed of a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. After this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed in a stopped state. You may do it. If the stop display of the normal figure change display game is the normal figure specifying result, the normal figure is hit and the pair of movable members 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and normally fluctuates. The game ball that has won the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, at the time of detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 4). Are stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special chart start memory is displayed on the storage display section (the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the center. Also on the display device 41 of the case 40, it is displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 receives the special prize 1 display 51 (variation display device) or the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display) based on the winning winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof. The first or second special figure variation display game is played on the device. The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which a display device (image display device) 41 displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. And as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is (Priority) to be executed.

  In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is subtracted by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable prize winning device 37) in a state that is not in the special game state or in the special game state, the start memory number is 1 if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number. By adding, one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch 38a, 39a is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. And, for example, a state in which a variable display by a plurality of variable display areas is maintained (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result forms are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of place). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operation state (normal operation state or short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the number of start memories, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. To do. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit 91 to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit on the basis of the loan request signal from the card unit to pay out the rental money.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36 a in the start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to and supplied from a gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, a winning opening switch 35a, a lower count switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, and an upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39. There are provided interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b that receive a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and convert it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  The reason why the proximity I / F 121a and the proximity I / F 121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The proximity I / F 121b is made smaller than the proximity I / F 121a in accordance with the number of input terminals that are insufficient, thereby reducing the cost. Note that the proximity I / F 121a having a necessary number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a and the upper count switch 39a are the second input. Input to port 123. Of the outputs from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a fraud signal fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy. A signal is also input. The frame radio wave fraud signal is a signal that is output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command. Signal. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. .

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes signals and payouts from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and a front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 Is input and supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid 1) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid for opening the second special variable winning device 39). 2) A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / close data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening 39b and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line connected to the anode terminal of the LED according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. A driver (driving circuit) 138 a and a second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off driving signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 and a fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device is output to the external information terminal 71. A fourth driver 138d is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and thus ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls a frame effect device such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates the moving light 16) provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, an effect agent switch 47 (effect) for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 by detecting the on / off state of the motor switch) and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 to the main control microcomputer 311 A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, and the like in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining whether or not the normal variation display game is missed is performed. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display device, a process for displaying a general symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of this general-purpose fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, , 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is missed is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is missed is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. To perform the process. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A opens, for example, the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b or the opening / closing of the second special variable winning device 39 by the large winning opening solenoid 39b. Control is performed to open the door 39c and allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. Opening the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) is performed in which this is repeated (repeated) a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times, or 2 times). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the normal variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short time operation state, and the normal variation winning device per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time (for example, 10,000 ms is 1000 ms). Further, in the short-time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game becomes a second stop time (for example, 704 ms) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms). It is. Further, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being the winning result, the first opening time (for example, 100 ms) in which the opening time (general power opening time) is the normal state. It is possible to perform control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1352 ms). Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. It is possible to set the number of second releases (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Further, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 6, an interrupt vector setting process (step S1) is first performed to set a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs. In step S2), a stack pointer setting process (step S3) is performed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. Next, a firing prohibition signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S4). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S5), an interrupt mode setting process (step S6) for setting the interrupt processing mode is performed, and a process for setting the power supply delay timer is performed (step S6). S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  The power supply delay timer is measured using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not a target for RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc., by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S17). S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether the checksums coincide with each other (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 7 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S21 of FIG. 7, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Thereafter, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S22). If the probability is not high (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. On the other hand, when the probability is high (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high-probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high-probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the collective display device 50 is turned on, for example. (Lighting) Data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of a power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the below-mentioned special figure game process rationally is transmitted to an effect control board (step S25), and it progresses to step S31.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all the RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to zero. (Step S27), the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (Step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (step S30), and it progresses to step S31.

  Note that the power failure recovery command transmitted in step S25 and the RAM initialization command transmitted in step S30 include a model designation command (spec designation command) indicating the type of gaming machine, The decorative special figure 1 holding number command and the decorative special figure 2 holding number command indicating the holding number, and the probability information command indicating the probability state are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. If the customer is waiting when the power is turned off, the customer waiting demo command is used. When initialized at power-on, a power-on command is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included.

  In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. For example, as shown in FIG. 8, the bit transposition pattern is a bit arrangement different from the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). ) Is a pattern that defines how to replace the data when it is stored. By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number) 2) After saving the initial value (start value) of a random number (winning random number) for determining the hit of the usual figure in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as an initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock. The big hit symbol random number and the hit random number have the same period as the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. Is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing). In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number makes a round. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times of checking and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 9 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation has not ended (step S57: N), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57: Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 10 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), the big hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step S62), and the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is updated by +1 (step S61). S63), the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the usual game. The “big hit symbol initial value random number 1” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit symbol stop symbol of the special figure 1, and the “big hit symbol initial value random number 2” is a symbol that determines the big hit symbol stop value of the special figure 2 It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 11 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, a register saving process (step S101) is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is first transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, input processing (step S102) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S103) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) and the like is performed. Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in step S4 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permitted state.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S104), a random number update process 1 (step S105), and a random number update process 2 (step S106) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a, the upper count switch 39a, A prize opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) is performed. Also, a special figure game process (step S108) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S110) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and that drives a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display a desired content, magnetic sensor switch 61 A magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S111) is performed in which a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality or a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality. Then, external information editing processing (step S112) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer. Subsequently, after performing the process of restoring the saved register data in step S101 (step S113), the process for permitting the interrupt (step S114) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S102) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), unused bit data is prepared (step S124), and bit data to be inverted is prepared. (Step S125). Thereafter, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S126), the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. . Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, unused bit data is prepared (step S129), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S131), the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S132), and the switch reading process (step S133) is performed. The input process is terminated.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S144). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S149). Thereafter, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 and the different bit is 0 in the first and second reads (step S150), and the deterministic bit pattern and the port input state 2 are ANDed. The confirmation bit is set (step S151).

  Next, an unconfirmed bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is set to 0 and a different bit is set to 1 (step S152), and the logic between the unconfirmed bit pattern and the final state at the time of the previous interrupt is generated. The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S154), exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken, and saved as a rising edge (step S155), The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process at a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 4) for outputting the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the big prize opening solenoids 38b and 39b is synthesized and output (step S162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S163). In step S164, the acquired data is output to the digit output port 136 (step S165). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S166), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (step S167).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 is loaded and combined and output to the external information output port 137 (step S168). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S169). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S170).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S171). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S172). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S173) and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is classified by the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 2 winning balls, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 13 winning balls, 14 winning balls). ) Is provided with a winning number counter area, and the number of counts in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step S181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting numbers in all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S190. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S184), and the target winning number counter is counted. The number of prize balls corresponding to the area is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the remaining number of winning balls and the acquired number of winning balls are added and saved as a new remaining number of winning balls in the remaining winning ball area (step S186). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the remaining prize ball number area is 10 or more, which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal (step S187). If not 10 or more (step S187; N), the process proceeds to step S190. Transition. If it is 10 or more (step S187; Y), a predetermined number 10 serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the remaining prize ball area (step S188), and the main prize ball signal is obtained. The value of the output count area is updated by +1 (step S189), and the process returns to step S187. As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

  In step S190, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S190), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step S191). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step S191; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step S191; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal status is in an idle state (step S192).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status is information in which whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal is set in an idle state in which payout control can be started immediately, payout Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  If the payout busy signal status is not in the idle state (step S192; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. When not in an idle state, a busy state and an indefinite state are included. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  If the payout busy signal status is in the idle state (step S192; Y), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S193). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S193), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number (step S193: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S194), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting number of all the winning number counter areas has been completed. (Step S195). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S195; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S195; N), the process returns to step S193 and the above processing is repeated.

  When it is determined in step S193 that there is a count number (step S193; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S196), and the target winning number counter is counted. A payout command corresponding to the area is acquired (step S197). Then, the payout command is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S198), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (step S199), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and the winning area (start winning prize port 36, ordinary variable prize winning device 37, general winning prize port 35, first special variable winning prize device 38, second prize provided in the gaming area 32 is controlled. Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variable prize winning device 39), and paying out of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing control, and the game control means outputs a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. ) To send the prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, the payout control means outputs a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. Have However, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the award corresponding to the fact that the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output for a predetermined period. The ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, a plurality of winning areas (start winning opening 36, normal variation winning apparatus 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39) having different number of winning balls are provided in the game area 32, The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is transmitted for each prize ball number. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. Will be.

  In addition to performing overall game control, access to predetermined winning areas (starting winning port 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39). Game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball, and payout control means (payout) that performs payout control of a game ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means Control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control, indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is awarded to a predetermined prize area. Including prize ball External information output means (game control device 100) that outputs (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, the external information output means is a state signal output from the payout control means, the payout control means The award ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined winning area (start winning prize port 36, ordinary variable prize winning device 37, general prize winning port 35, A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the special variable prize-winning device 38 and the second special variable prize-winning device 39), and one prize ball when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. It is configured to transmit a command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. And It is possible to store the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted by updating at the time of winning a game ball in a predetermined prize area and by updating in accordance with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 16 shows the random number update process 1 (step S105) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the hit random numbers, jackpot symbol random number 1, and jackpot symbol random number 2 that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S221).

  If the normal hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; N), it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224). In addition, when the normal hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; Y), the hit random number initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S222), and the next hit random number of the loaded normal number is next time. The initial value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S223). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224).

  If the jackpot symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; N), it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227). If the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (step S225), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 1 is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S226). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227).

  When the big hit symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. When the big hit symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value (step S228), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number 2 is set. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S229), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 17 shows the random number update process 2 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. The value of the register to which is set is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated. When the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated (random number counter) is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the R register with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) The mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value is set, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step S236). S238), the process proceeds to step S239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). The process proceeds to step S242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) as the lower 1 byte of the random value. ) Is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

  Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Accordingly, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the random number of the variation pattern for

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 18 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to one lower count switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S301), and a large winning is achieved. In spite of the fact that the mouth is not open, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the big winning mouth and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  In the fraud monitoring table, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the illegal winning number area, the illegal winning error notification command, the number of illegal winnings Information of an upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination), a winning mouth monitoring table, and notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. The winning opening monitoring table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the winning counter area 1 address, and the winning counter area 2 address. These fraud monitoring tables and winning opening monitoring tables are prepared according to the respective switches to be monitored.

  Thereafter, the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switch 38a in the lower grand prize winning opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is achieved. An illegal & winning prize monitoring process (step S304) is executed. Then, a fraud monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 39a in the upper prize winning opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is prepared (step S305), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is detected. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process (step S306) is executed.

  Next, a fraud monitoring table is prepared for a winning switch (a start port 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric train (step S307), monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning ( Step S308) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for a winning opening switch (in this case, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing (step S309), and the number of winnings for which the winning number is updated. Counter update processing (step S310) is performed.

  Next, a state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose state should be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S311). This state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like can be performed. When the value of the state scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the state based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

  Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S314). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S315) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on a signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and state scanning is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, the state monitoring based on the frame radio wave improper signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (step S316). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step S317; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step S317; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S317), and a gaming machine state check is performed to determine whether an error has occurred. Processing (step S318) is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch or the like can be performed. Is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S319) for setting a busy signal status based on a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. To do. Note that the processing from step S317 to S319 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 ms, the processing from step S317 to S319 is performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 19 shows the fraud & winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306, S308) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. This fraud & winning monitoring process is performed on each of the two lower count switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the start port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. This is a process performed on the machine. For the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39) and Fuden (ordinary variable prize-winning device 37), it is easy to cheat by opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the prize ball. In addition to detection of fraud, fraud monitoring.

  In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the error monitoring target prize opening switch is the lower count switch 38a. In the case of the upper count switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Further, when the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the start port 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is being executed based on the normal hit.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of illegal winnings after the addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not (5) has been exceeded (step S325).

  The number of judgments is five, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught by the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent the player from judging that the signal is fraudulent when the prize is received or when noise is added to the signal, and is not simply judged as an error although it is not illegal.

  If the determined number has not been exceeded (step S325; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330). When the number of determinations is exceeded (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S326), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area (step 326). S327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting a winning ball is performed. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step S333). If the notification timer update is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is allowed to be updated (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the one lower count switch 38a, and is not allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the other lower count switch 38a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the first special variation winning device 38 and time-up in half of a specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . Note that the update of the notification timer is always permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper count switch 39a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335). If the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S336), and the fraudulent winning cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Preparation is made (step S337). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the number of illegal winnings of interest is cleared ( In step S339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S340). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S340).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag and the value of the target illegal flag area do not match (step S340; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S341), and command setting processing is performed ( Step S342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 20 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S310 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Determination is made (step S352).

  If there is no input (step S352: N), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S361). If there is an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S354). Step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). When an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and it is determined whether all switches have been monitored (step S361). . If an overflow has occurred (step S359; Y), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S361).

  If all the switches have not been monitored (step S361; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If all the switches have been monitored (step S361; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Command setting processing]
FIG. 21 shows the command setting process (step S342) in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this command setting process, first, command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S361), the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S362), and it is determined whether the command is being transmitted. (Step S363).

  If a command is being transmitted (step S363; Y), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366). If the command is not being transmitted (step S363; N), the transmission circuit is initialized because the circuit may be abnormal (step S364), and the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer ( After step S365), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366).

  Then, the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S367), and it is determined whether a command is being transmitted (step S368). If the command is being transmitted (step S368; Y), the command setting process is terminated. If the command is not being transmitted (step S368; N), the circuit may be abnormal, so the transmission circuit is initialized (step S369), and the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer. (Step S370), the command setting process is terminated.

  Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 22 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S319) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S371). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is on (step S371; Y), a busy state flag is set as the determination status (step S372), and the previous busy signal data is loaded (step S374). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S371; N), the idle state flag is set as the determination status (step S373), and the previous busy signal data is loaded (step S374).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current signal is different from the previous signal, that is, whether or not there has been a change in on or off (step S375). If not (step S375; N), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1. (Step S378). If they are different (step S375; Y), the current signal state is saved as the previous busy signal data (step S376), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step S377), and the busy signal monitoring timer is set. +1 is updated (step S378).

  Next, it is determined whether the time counted by the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the signal determination time (for example, 32 ms) (step S379). If the signal determination time has not been reached (step S379; N), the payout busy signal is determined. End the check process. If the signal confirmation time has been reached (step S379; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept before the confirmation time (step S380), and whether the value of the busy signal status area matches the determination status? Is determined (step S381).

  If it matches the determination status (step S381; Y), the payout busy signal check process ends. If the determination status does not match (step S381; N), the determination status is saved in the busy signal status area (step S382), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is obtained. Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) will be described later.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the lower count switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 or the upper count switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Perform the process.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. And it is determined whether the value of a special figure game process timer is 0 (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is 0 (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the special figure game process number referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step A6). Then, the return address after the branch process ends is saved in the stack area (step A7), and the game branch process (step A8) is performed according to the game process number.

  If the game process number is “0” in step A8, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure fluctuation processing are performed. A special figure routine process (step A9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. In step A8, when the game process number is “1”, a special figure changing process (step for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc.) A10) is performed.

  In step A8, if the game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, fanfare command setting according to the type of the big hit or a big winning opening opening pattern for each big hit A special chart display process (step A11) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the setting, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like.

  If the game process number is “3” in step A8, the fanfare / setting for setting the opening time of the big prize opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big prize opening, etc. Processing during the interval (step A12) is performed. If the game process number is “4” in step A8, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, or a big prize winning ball remaining ball process A special winning opening opening process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.

  If the game process number is “5” in step A8, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening and the big hit end process are performed. The prize winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) for setting information necessary for the game is performed. If the game process number is “6” in step A8, a big hit end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process (step A9) is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A16), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A17) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A18), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A19) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not 0 in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A16 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, after preparing a table for setting the information on hold by the first start port (start winning prize port 36) (step A111), the special drawing start port switch common process (Step A112) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step A112 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step A116.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric winning component (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball can be won. If it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A115, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A114).

  In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A114 that there is no fraud in ordinary power transmission (step A114; N), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A115), The starting port switch common process (step A116) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, if it is determined in step A114 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A114; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A112 and A116) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the special view start port switch common process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A201). If there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step A201; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A201; Y), it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; Y), after saving the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored (step A203), the target random number latch register is monitored. The extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared (step A204).

  Subsequently, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port signal which is the number of times information related to the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The output count is loaded (step A205), the loaded value is updated by 1 (step A206), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A207). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A207; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A208), and the process proceeds to step A209. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A207; Y), the process proceeds to step A209.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A209). If the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit (step A209; Y), the special figure hold number to be updated (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) is updated by 1 (step A212), and is monitored. The decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A213), and the command setting process (step A214) is performed.

  Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of special figure hold corresponding to the monitoring start switch to be monitored is calculated (step A215), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A216). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A217), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A218). Further, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step A219). Then, a special figure hold information determination process (step A220) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory is provided. In addition, the start winning storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. And various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting storage up to a predetermined number.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A209 that the number of special figure hold is not less than the upper limit (step A209; N), a special figure hold number command (pending overflow command) is prepared (step A210) and command setting processing (step A211) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A220) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  As shown in FIG. 26, first, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the pre-reading effect are satisfied (step A231), and if not satisfied (step A231; N), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. . Moreover, when satisfy | filling (step A231; Y), the process regarding the following prefetch effect is performed.

  Here, the case where the condition for executing the pre-reading effect is satisfied is a case where the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special-purpose start port switch common process is the input of the start port 2 switch 37a. In addition, when the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special-purpose start port switch common processing is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, when the open extension function of the normal variable winning device 37 is not in operation, This is a case where it is not in a state, and a case where it is not in a big hit (special game state).

  In the process related to the prefetch effect performed when the conditions for executing the prefetch effect are satisfied (step A231; Y), first, whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not is a big hit. A big hit determination process (step A232) is performed to determine whether or not. If the determination result is a big hit (step A233; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A234), the big hit symbol random number is checked and the corresponding big hit stop symbol is set. A pattern is acquired (step A235), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the prefetch stop symbol pattern area (step A237). On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A233; N), a stoppage stop symbol pattern is set (step A236), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the prefetch stop symbol pattern region (step A237).

  Thereafter, a pre-read symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A238), and command setting processing is performed (step A239). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A240) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed to prepare a latter half fluctuation pattern setting information table corresponding to the target starter switch (step A240). A241), a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A242).

  Then, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A243), and command setting processing is performed ( Step A244), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A240 and the variation pattern setting process in step A242 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, is the special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38 or second special variable winning device 39) being open, that is, in a special gaming state? Is determined (step A251). If the big prize opening is not open (step A251; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the big prize opening is open (step A251; Y), 0 is set to the prize counter for counting the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening that is added in the current big prize opening switch monitoring process. (Step A252), it is determined whether the lower prize winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether the first special variation winning device 38 is in a special gaming state (Step A253).

  When the lower prize winning opening is being opened (step A253; Y), it is determined whether or not the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed at the end of one round (step A254). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A254; Y), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A254; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower winning port switch 1 (one lower count switch 38a) (step A255).

  If there is no input to the lower major prize opening switch 1 (step A255; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259). If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 1 (step A255; Y), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A256), and a lower major prize opening count command is prepared (step A257). Then, a command setting process (step A258) is performed to determine whether or not there is an input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259).

  If there is no input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (step A259; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 2 (step A259; Y), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A260), and a lower major prize opening count command is prepared (step A261). Then, command setting processing (step A262) is performed, and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268).

  On the other hand, when the lower major prize opening is not open (step A253; N), that is, the upper major prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is being opened (special game that opens the second special variable prize winning device 39). If it is in the state), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch (upper count switch 39a) (step A263). If there is no input to the top prize winning opening switch (step A263; N), the big winning prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the top prize winning opening switch (step A263; Y), it is determined whether the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed (step A264).

  When it is not in the process of remaining the winning prize remaining ball (step A264; N), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A265), and an upper winning prize count command is prepared (step A266). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A264; Y), an upper winning ticket count command is prepared (step A266). Thereafter, command setting processing (step A267) is performed to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). In the case of the top prize winning opening, the top prize winning count command is transmitted even during the processing of the remaining prize winning ball in order to produce an effect by winning.

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268), when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step A268; N), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of big winning mouth counts (step A269), and the number of big winning mouth counts is the upper limit (winning in one round). It is determined whether or not the number of possible game balls has been exceeded (step A270).

  When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A270; N), the big winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A270; Y), the big winning mouth count is kept at the upper limit (step A271), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step). A272). Then, the pointer is loaded from the big hit control pointer upper limit value area (step A273), the loaded pointer is saved in the big hit midpoint control pointer area (step A274), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process (steps A17 and A19) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbols. As shown in FIG. 28, in the symbol fluctuation control process, first, the special figure fluctuation control flag relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing among the first special figure and the second special figure. Is checked (step A281).

  If the special figure changing flag is changing (step A282; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step S282). A283), among the first special figure and the second special figure, the flashing control timer according to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by -1 (step A284), and the value of the timer is 0. That is, it is determined whether the time is up (step A285).

  If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step A285; N), display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step A288). If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step A285; Y), the blinking control timer initial value is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step A286), and the first and second special figures are saved. Among them, the variable symbol number related to the control target special figure (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step A287), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A288). ). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (step A282; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step A289). . Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target stop symbol number area is acquired (step A290), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. It becomes.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (step A306). If it is determined that the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step A306; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A311). If the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (step A311; N) saves the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), a command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311, (step A311; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A322), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (Step A323). Then, a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A325). The normal process transition setting process 1 ends.

  Returning to FIG. 29, if the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 in step A301 (step A301; N), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number after -1 update is prepared ( Step A302) and command setting processing (step A303) are performed. Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is performed, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step A305) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated. In step A306, if the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step A306; N), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number after the -1 update is prepared (step A307). Then, command setting processing (step A308) is performed. Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A309) is performed, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step A310) of special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (steps A307 and A302), the subtraction number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure variation display game, and the current special figure 1 hold number or A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number minus -1 from the special figure 2 hold number is prepared. The process of actually updating the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number by -1 is the fluctuation start information setting process (FIG. 39) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A309) or the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Step A441).

  In this way, the special figure 2 hold count is checked before the special figure 1 hold count check, and if the special figure 2 hold count is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is executed. Will be. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A309) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 31, first, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set the shift information and the jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 32 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A341). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A342). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A343) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A343) is a big hit (step A344; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A341 (step A345). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A343) is not a big hit (step A344; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended while saving the deviation information to the big hit flag 1.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 33 shows the big hit determination process (step A343) in the big hit flag 1 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A351), and it is determined whether the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; Y), that is, when it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step A353).

  If it is in a high probability state (step A353; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A354), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). ). If not in the high probability state (step A353; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A355), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). .

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; Y), that is, when it is out of place, the determination result is set as out (step A357), and the big hit determination process ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; N), that is, if the big hit is, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A358), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A361). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A361; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A362). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A364). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A367). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Further, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A368), and the big prize opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the big prize opening is released. Save in the information area (step A369). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A372).

  On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step A361; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A370), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A370). A371), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A372). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A373), and command setting processing (step A374) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A375), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A376). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (step A334) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in short time (short time state) (step A381). If it is not in the special drawing time (step A381; N), the normal variation pattern selection group information table is set (step A382). If the special drawing time is short (step A381; Y), the time variation variable pattern selection group information table is set (step A383).

  Then, the number of special figure hold corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag is loaded (step A384), the fluctuation pattern selection group information corresponding to the special figure hold number is acquired and saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A385). . Thereby, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) for starting the fluctuation, the number-of-holds information that is information on the number of start memories for the type of special figure, The variable distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including information on whether or not the state is saved is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is used to select a fluctuation group later. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

  Next, a distribution base pointer table is set (step A386), and a distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A387). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired pointer (step A388), the value after the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A389), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the variable distribution information 2 obtained from the stop symbol pattern information and the production mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is used to select a fluctuation group later. In addition, as for the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the short-time state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process (step A336) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A391), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A392). ). Then, it is determined whether the production mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (step A393). If the production mode number is not less than 2 (step A393; N), it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a slippage stop symbol pattern (step A394). If the stop symbol pattern is not a slippage stop symbol pattern (step A394; N). ) Loads the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepares it (step A397).

  On the other hand, when the production mode number is less than 2 (step A393; Y), or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern (step A394; Y), the variable distribution information 1 from the table prepared in step A392. The address of the table corresponding to is acquired (step A395). Next, the acquired address is prepared as the address of the latter-half variation group (step A396), and the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A397).

  When the production mode number is less than 2 or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern, the address is obtained by taking into account the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information that is information related to the start memory number. Thus, the variation pattern selection mode is made different depending on the number of starting memories.

  Thereafter, 2-byte distribution processing (step A398) is performed, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A399), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding number 1) The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared (Step A400). Then, a sorting process (step A401) is performed, and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A402). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step A403), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and 2 (including the determined second half variation number) (step A404). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A405), and a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A406). ). Thereafter, a sorting process (step A407) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step A408), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 37 shows a 2-byte sorting process (step A398) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the leading data of the latter half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A411). ). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

  If the first data in the latter-half variation group table is a code with no sorting (step A412; Y), update to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A417) and end the 2-byte sorting process. To do. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter-half variation group table is not a code without distribution (step A412; N), the first distribution value specified in the latter-half variation group table is acquired (step A413).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A413 from the random value loaded in Step A397 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (Step A414). It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A415). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A415; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A416), the process proceeds to step A413 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired in step A413, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random value as the new random value in step A415, and a new random value is further subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step A414). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A415).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A415 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A415; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step A415 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A415; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A417), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 38 shows the distribution process (steps A401 and A407) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (Step A421). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without sorting (step A422; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A427), and the sorting is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A422; N), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step A423).

  Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A423 from the random number value (the value of the variation pattern random number 2 or the variation pattern random number 3) loaded in step A400 or A406, a new random value is calculated ( In step A424), it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A425; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A426), the process proceeds to step A423, and the subsequent steps Process.

  That is, in step A423, after the distribution value specified next in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random number value in step A425. Further, a new random value is calculated (step A424). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A425 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step A425 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A427), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the variation start information setting process (step A337) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A431). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A432), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A433). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A434), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A435).

  Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A436), and the addition value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A437). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A438), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A439), and command setting processing is performed (step A440). . Next, the special symbol hold number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by −1 (step A441), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A442), and the random number storage region is shifted. (Step A443), and the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (Step A444).

  Thereafter, as a process related to the extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game, first, the stop extension information area is cleared (step A445). When the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (step A446; Y), the effect mode number is 2 (step A447; Y), and the remaining number of rotations (game number) in the effect mode is 1. In (Step A448; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (Step A449).

  If the special figure is not in high probability (step A449; N), the stop extension information 1 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A450), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step A452). A command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the variation start information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extended stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time). If the special figure high probability is present (step A449; Y), the stop extension information 2 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A451), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step S451). A452), a command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the change start information setting process is terminated. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extended display time 2 (second extended stop time) that is longer than the normal special figure display time.

  On the other hand, when the stop symbol pattern is not an outlier stop symbol pattern (step A446; N), when the effect mode number is not 2 (step A447; N), or when the remaining number of rotations (game number) in effect mode 2 is not 1. (Step A448; N) ends the change start information setting process. In this case, the stop time extension is not set and the normal stop time is set. In this way, the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the specific rotation speed, and the state of the production mode. It has come to be. Thereby, for example, it is possible to set an effect that is continuous between the variation time and the stop time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  As shown in FIG. 40, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A461), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A462) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information which is a table in which information is set for performing various information setting processing (step A464, see FIG. 35) and referring to various information regarding the fluctuation pattern setting of the second special figure fluctuation display game. A table is prepared (step A465). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (see step A466, FIG. 36) for setting a variation pattern for the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information for the second special figure variation display game. (See Step A467, FIG. 39), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 41 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A462) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this process, the same process as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 32 is performed for the second start-up memory. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A471). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A472). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A473, see FIG. 33) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A473) is a big hit (step A474; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A471 (step A475). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A473) is not a big hit (step A474; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 34 is performed on the second start-up memory. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A481). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A481; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A482). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A483), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A484). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A485), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A486). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A487). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Furthermore, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A488), and the big winning opening release information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and the big winning opening is released. Save in the information area (step A489). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A492).

  On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step A481; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number region (step A490), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region (step A490). A491), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A492). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A493), and command setting processing (step A494) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A495), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A496). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

  In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning hole 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
FIG. 43 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special-figure normal process (see FIG. 29). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A501), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A502).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A503), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A504). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A505), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A506), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
FIG. 44 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the special-figure normal process (see FIG. 29). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A512).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A516), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the special figure changing process, it is first determined whether or not there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (step A601). If there is no stop extension information (step A601; N), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A602), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step A606). To complete the special figure display process.

  If there is stop extension information (step A601; Y), it is determined whether the stop extension information is 1 (step A603). If it is the stop extension information 1 (step A603; Y), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A604), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step S604) A606) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not stop extension information 1 (step A603; N), that is, when it is stop extension information 2, special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A605), The special figure display process transition setting process (step A606) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step A606) in the special figure changing process described above. In this special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number “2” related to the special figure display process is set (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A612).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (steps A613, A614), and the symbol related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output is determined in the external information terminal. A control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the count signal control timer area (step A615). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A616). ) As the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A617), the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step A11) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the special figure displaying process, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A621), and the RWM big hit flag 2 is loaded. A process of clearing the area (step A622) is performed. Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A623). If it is determined that the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A623; Y), the RWM big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step A628), and the second special A test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A629), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A630).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A623 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A623; N) as a result of the check, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded. (Step A624), the RWM jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (Step A625). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A626). If it is determined that the big hit flag is a big hit (step A626; Y), the big hit (first figure big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is determined. A test signal related to the start is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A627), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A630) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A630), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A631). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A632).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step A633), and a command setting process (step A634) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the winning result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A635), and a command setting process ( Step A636) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A637), and the command setting process (step A638). )I do.

  Next, the winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A639). Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the special game process timer area (step A640). Then, the winning prize mouth illegal winning number area of the winning prize opening corresponding to the winning prize opening opening information (the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38 or the second special variable winning prize apparatus 39) is cleared (step A641), and the special winning opening is opened. A fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the information (step A642).

  Next, the special figure game mode flag is loaded (step A643), and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A644). Thereby, the information on the production mode when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later. Thereafter, fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A645) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit at step A626 in FIG. 47 (step A626; N), the special mode variation display for setting the short time state is performed by performing the production mode information check process (step A646) regarding the setting of the production mode. Time shortening fluctuation frequency update processing (step A647) for managing the number of game executions is performed. Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A648, see FIG. 30) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A645) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A651) and processed in the special figure game process number area. The number is saved (step A652).

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special gaming state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A653), and a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A654). . Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A655), and the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A656). Save the low probability of ordinary figure & no ordinary power support flag in the flag area (step A657).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A658), and the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 59) related to the display of the high probability state ( In step A659), the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A660). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A661), and a special figure variation display that can be executed in a short time state. The time reduction variation frequency area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A662). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and a normal probability state and a normal operation state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A663), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A664). Then, the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A665), the effect mode 1 command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A666), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. . As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, details of the effect mode information check process (step A646) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A671). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A671; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A671; N), the effect remaining rotational speed, which is the number of times that the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A672). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect has become 0 (step A673). When the remaining effect rotation speed becomes 0 (step A673; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A674), and the next mode transition is made. The address of the table corresponding to the information is acquired (step A675).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A676), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed area (step S676). A677), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A678). Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A679), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A680), command setting processing (step A681) is performed, and effect mode information check processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, when the remaining effect rotation speed is not 0 (step A673; N), that is, when the current effect mode continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (for example, 8 times). It is determined whether there is any (step A682). If the remaining effect rotation speed is not the specified rotation speed (step A682; N), the effect mode information check process ends. When the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (step A682; Y), an effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A683), command setting processing (step A684) is performed, and effect mode information check processing is performed. finish. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time shortening variation number update process (step A647) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the time shortening fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not a special figure high probability (high probability state) is being reached (step A691). When the special figure high probability is in progress (step A691; Y), the time-reduced variation number of times update processing is terminated. If it is not in the special figure high probability (step A691; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is short (time short state) (step A692).

  If it is not during the special drawing time reduction (step A692; N), the time-reduced variation number of times update processing is terminated. If the special figure time is short (step A692; Y), the time shortening variation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be in the short time state is updated by -1 (step A693), and the time shortening variation number is updated. Is determined to be 0 (step A694). If the time shortening variation number is not 0 (step A694; N), that is, if the time-short state continues in the next special figure variation display game, the time shortening variation number updating process is terminated. If the time shortening variation count is 0 (step A694; Y), that is, if the time-short state ends in this special figure variation display game, a probability information command (time-short end) is prepared (step A695), Command setting processing (step A696) is performed. After that, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) is performed (step A697), and the time shortening variation number update process is ended.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 2 (at the end of short time)]
FIG. 51 shows special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) (step A697) in the above-described time-reduced variation frequency update process. In this special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction), first, a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A701), and a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step A702).

  Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A703), and the ordinary low probability & no power support flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A704). Further, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A705), and a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A706). The normal process transition setting process 2 (at the time saving end) is terminated.

  Here, the types of special results and the opening / closing patterns of the special prize opening (special variable prize device) in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described. There are four types of special results: 2R variation, 11R variation, 11R normal and 16R variation. The 2R probability variation, 11R probability variation and 16R probability variation are 2, 11, 16 rounds in the special gaming state, respectively, and the probability state is set to the high probability state until the next special result is derived after the special gaming state ends. This is a special result that is considered to be a short time. In addition, 11R normally has 11 rounds in the special gaming state, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the normal probability state, and a special figure variation display game of a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times). It is a special result that is in a short time until execution.

  In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment includes a lower grand prize opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) and an upper large prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), each having a plurality of opening / closing patterns. . One opening / closing pattern is selected from the plurality of opening / closing patterns in accordance with the type of special result. In the following opening and closing patterns, the value shown as the opening time of the big winning opening indicates the maximum opening time, and when a predetermined number of game balls flow into the winning opening before the maximum opening time elapses in one round Closes the grand opening without waiting for the maximum opening time to elapse and the round ends.

  FIG. 52 shows an open / close pattern of the upper university winning opening (second special variable winning device 39). The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 52 (a) is selected when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the short-time state when derived. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, the opening time of 52 ms is set in the first round (1R), and the opening time of 52 ms is set in the next round (2R) after the interval time of 1448 ms is interposed. Then, after the ending time of 22400 ms elapses, the special game state ends.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 52 (b) is selected when the special result is 2R probability variation and the time is short when the special result is derived. The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 has the same opening / closing manner as the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern, but has an ending time of 1400 ms. The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 52 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, the round in which the opening time of 52 ms is set is 16 rounds with the interval time of 1448 ms, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state is ended.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 52 (d) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, first, in the first round (1R), the opening of 52 ms is performed 16 times with the closing time of 1448 ms similarly to the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3. Up to this point, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, and it is difficult to recognize which opening / closing pattern the player has as the same effect on the display device 41 or the like. Thereafter, a promotion video is displayed on the display device 41 during the closing time of 6300 ms to notify that it is the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, and the opening of 26168 ms is performed to finish the first round. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 52 (e) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5, in the first round (1R), first, 52 ms is opened, then 26948 ms is opened with a closing time of 5948 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  FIG. 53 shows the opening / closing pattern of the lower grand prize opening (the first special variable winning device 38). The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 53A is selected when the special result is 11R probability change or 11R normal. In the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1, in the first round (1R), first, the opening is performed for 200 ms, and then the opening is performed for 28000 ms with the closing time of 5800 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 10 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 53 (b) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In this lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1 or 3 until the end of the eleventh round. It is difficult to recognize whether the pattern is an open / close pattern. After the end of 11 rounds, a round in which an opening time of 200 ms is set with an interval time of 1500 ms is repeated 5 times, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 53 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results which are 16R probability variation. In this lower big prize opening / closing pattern 3, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1 or 2 until the end of the eleventh round. It is difficult to recognize whether the pattern is an open / close pattern. Then, after the end of the 11th round, a promotion video is displayed on the display device 41 at an interval time of 13000 ms to notify that the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 is present. Thereafter, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set is repeated 5 times with an interval time of 2000 ms, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A12) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A751), and the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening (second special variable winning device 39). It is determined whether the open / close pattern is 1 to 3 (step A752).

  When the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step A752; Y), the control pointers (S (start value), E (end) corresponding to the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are set. Value)) is set (step A759), and the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. By setting the start value and the end value of the control pointer, it is possible to set the opening / closing and closing time of the big winning opening in one round based on the big winning opening control table. In the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, since the execution time of one round is short, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state instead of every round. The round command corresponding to the number is not transmitted. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step A752; N), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A753), and command setting processing is performed. (Step A754) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the round to be started is the first round (1R) (step A755). If it is the first round (step A755; Y), the big prize opening information is the lower special prize opening (first special prize) It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 38) is an open / close pattern (step A756). If the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A756; Y), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern is set (step A760), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. If the big prize opening information is not the lower big opening opening / closing pattern (step A756; N), it is determined whether the big winning opening information is the upper big opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757).

  When the big prize opening information is the upper prize opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; Y), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper prize opening / closing pattern 4 is set. (Step A758), the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG. Further, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; N), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening / closing pattern 5 is set. (Step A761), the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the started round is not the first round (1R) (step A755; N), it is determined whether the started round is 2-11 rounds (step A762), and the started rounds are 2-11. If it is round (step A762; Y), it is determined whether the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening / closing pattern (step A763). Then, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern (step A763; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to 2 to 11 rounds of the lower winning opening / closing pattern are set (step A763; N). A764), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern (step A763; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening / closing pattern are set (step S763). A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG.

  If the started round is not 2 to 11 rounds (step A762; N), it is determined whether the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (step A766). Then, when the special prize opening information is the upper prize opening / closing pattern (step A766; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper prize opening / closing pattern are set (step S766). A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. If the big prize opening information is not the upper big opening / closing pattern (step A766; N), it is determined whether the big winning opening information is the lower big opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767).

  If the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th round and after of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 are set (step A768), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th and subsequent rounds of the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 3 are set ( Step A769) and the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG.

  55, the start value (S) of the set control pointer is saved in the big hit middle control pointer area (step A770), and the end value (E) of the set control pointer is saved in the big hit middle control pointer upper limit area. Save (Step A771). Then, solenoid information setting processing (step A772) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the big prize opening information is a lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A773).

  When the big prize opening information is a lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A773; Y), the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is performed (step A774), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated. Further, when the special prize opening information is not the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern (Step A773; N), the process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening is performed (Step A775), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended. One of the open / close patterns shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 is set by the above processing.

[Solenoid information setting process]
FIG. 56 shows the solenoid information setting process (step A772) in the above-described fanfare / interval process. In the solenoid information setting process, first, a big winning opening control address table is set (step A781), and the address of the big winning opening control table corresponding to the big hit control pointer is acquired (step A782). After that, output data is acquired, saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A783), opening / closing time value is acquired and special figure game process timer area is saved (step A784), and the solenoid information setting process is terminated. To do. With this process, opening and closing of the special winning opening and the time are set.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 57 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A774). In the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, the processing number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the lower prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793), and the information of the big winning prize count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize is cleared (step A794). . Then, the lower big prize opening controlling flag is saved in the big prize opening discrimination flag area (step A795), and the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 58 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A775). In the special prize opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the special prize opening opening process (step A 801), and the processing number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A802). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the top prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A803), and information in the big winning count area storing the number of winning prizes in the big winning prize is cleared (step A804). . Then, the top winning mouth opening control flag is saved in the big winning mouth distinguishing flag area (step A805), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the big prize opening opening process, first, the big hit control pointer is updated by +1 (step A811), and it is determined whether the value of the control pointer has reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A811). Step A812).

  When the value of the control pointer has not reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A812; N), solenoid information setting processing (step A819, see FIG. 56) is performed. Thereby, the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening according to the updated control pointer is set. Then, a process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening is performed 3 (step A820), and the process for opening a special prize opening is ended. As shown in FIG. 61, in the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 3, the process number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A841), and the processing number is set in the special game process number area. Save (step A842), and finish the process transition setting process 3 during the special winning opening opening.

  Referring back to FIG. 59, when the value of the control pointer reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A812; Y), the big prize opening information is the upper big prize opening short opening pattern (upper big prize opening release pattern 1). -3) is determined (step A813). If the big prize opening information is the upper prize opening short opening pattern (step A813; Y), the big prize opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A818) is performed, and the process for opening the big prize opening is ended. In this case, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special gaming state, and interval commands and ending commands are not transmitted.

  In addition, when the big prize opening information is not the upper prize opening short opening pattern (step A813; N), the current round number in the special game state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM, Are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (step A814). If it is not the final round (step A814; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A815), command setting processing (step A817) is performed, and the winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting processing ( Step A818) is performed, and the special winning opening opening process is terminated. If it is the final round (step A814; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step A816), and the command setting process (step A817) is performed. Then, a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A818) is performed, and the special winning opening open process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 60 shows the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A818) in the above-described special winning opening open process. In this special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning prize remaining ball processing (step A831), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A831). Step A832). Thereafter, the winning prize remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A833). Then, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize-winning device 38 or the open / close door 39c of the second special variable prize-winning device 39, off data for turning off the big prize opening solenoid 38b or 39b is provided as a big prize opening solenoid. The data is saved in the output data area (step A834), and the big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the winning ball remaining ball process, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special gaming state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A851).

  If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A851; N), the current round number and the interval time corresponding to the special prize opening information are saved in the special game processing timer area (step A852). ), The fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step A853) is performed, and the winning prize remaining ball process is terminated. The interval time is set to a time corresponding to the current round number and the special winning opening opening information (for example, 68 ms for the upper winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3). The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round to the time that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses, and further from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time until the interval time elapses. For example, in the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, it is 1448 ms.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A851; Y), the game mode flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag saving area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived. (Step A854). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and the special winning opening release information is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A855), and the big hit ending process transition setting process (step A856) is performed, and the big winning prize remaining ball The process ends.

  The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses from the end of the final round, and the ending time from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time. This is the period until elapses. For example, when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the short-time state at the time of deriving the special result, that is, when the special result is in the production mode other than the short-time state, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 1, the ending time is 21020 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is set to 22400 ms, including 1380 ms spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 and the like in this ending period. Further, when the special result is 2R probability change and the time is short when the special result is derived, that is, when the special mode is the production mode selected in the time short state when the special result is derived, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 2, the ending time is 20 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is set to 1400 ms in combination with 1380 ms spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 63 shows the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step A853) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In this fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A861), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A861). A862).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of opening of the lower university winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A863), and the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is opened. A signal relating to the end is saved in the test signal output data area (step A864). Then, the special winning opening determination flag area is cleared (step A865), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 64 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A856) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A871), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A872). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening completion of the lower university winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A873), and the opening of the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is ended. Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A874).

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A875), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A876). ), The information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A877). Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value for the number of rounds is cleared (step A878), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A879), and the information in the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step A880). Thereafter, the big hit control pointer upper limit value area for storing the end value of the big hit control pointer is cleared (step A881), the big winning opening discrimination flag area is cleared (step A882), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended. To do.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A15) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in this jackpot end process, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the current special game state is set to a high probability after the special game state ends. It is determined whether the data is high probability data set when the state is reached (step A901).

  If it is not high probability data (step A901; N), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step A902), and if it is high probability data (step A901; Y), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step A903). ), A probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A904), and a command setting process (step A905) is performed.

  Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A906). Then, with reference to the set production mode information setting table, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area (step A907). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A908), and the next mode transition to the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is performed. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A909).

  Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A910), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A911), and command setting processing (step A912) is performed. Then, special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step A913), and the big hit end process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 66 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the above jackpot end process. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A921), and a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A922).

  Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A923), and the special figure low probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A924). After that, the probability information command (short time) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A925), the initial value (eg, 70) of the time reduction fluctuation number is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A926), and the big hit ends The setting process 1 ends.

  By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 70) of the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state ends when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (eg, 70 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 67 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A903) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A931), and a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

  Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A933), and the special figure high probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A934). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A935), the time reduction variation frequency area is cleared (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived.

  That is, the specific game in which the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (short-time state) that extends a period during which the normal variation winning device 37 is open for a predetermined period after the special game state ends. It serves as state generation control means.

[Special figure transition setting process 3]
FIG. 68 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A913) in the big hit end process described above. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A941), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A942). .

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A943), and a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A944). Subsequently, the information of the probability variation determination flag area is cleared (step A945), the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A946), and the number in the game state display number area is a short time number. Is saved (step A947). Then, a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period flag area is saved (step A948), and a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period flag area is saved (step A949). The normal process transition setting process 3 ends.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the usual game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  As shown in FIG. 69, in the ordinary game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the usual game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the usual game process timer has become 0 (step B4).

  If the value of the normal game process timer is 0 (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time is up or has already been up, the normal figure referred to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. A process of setting the game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table (step B6). Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step B7), the game branch process (step B8) is performed according to the game process number.

  In step B8, if the game process number is “0”, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of effects, A usual figure process (step B9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. If the game process number is “1” in step B8, a normal map change process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process is performed.

  In step B8, if the game process number is “2”, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the electric power depending on whether or not the time reduction state is in progress, A general map display process (step B11) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map process is performed. In step B8, if the game process number is “3”, the process during the normal map process for setting the information necessary to continue the process during the normal map process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process ( Step B12) is performed.

  If the game process number is “4” in step B8, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the end process for each normal figure. If the game process number is “5” in step B8, a normal figure end process (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (step B9) is performed.

  Then, after preparing a general pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B15), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B16) ) To complete the usual game process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). When there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), the number of common chart holds is acquired and it is determined whether the number of common chart holds is less than the upper limit (step B102).

  When the number of reserved maps is less than the upper limit (step B102; Y), the number of reserved maps is updated by +1 (step B103), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved maps is calculated. (Step B104). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B105), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B102 that the number of pending drawings is not less than the upper limit value (step B102; N). Ends the gate switch monitoring process.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power prize winning switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, it is during the ordinary figure, that is, the ordinary figure changing display game is in the winning state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations. It is determined whether or not there is (step B121). Then, when it is normal (step B121; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122), and there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; Y). If it is determined, the count of the utility counter is updated by +1 (step B123).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter has reached an upper limit (for example, 9) (step B124), and it is determined that the count has reached the upper limit (step B124; Y). Then, the pointer (the value at which the hit ends) is loaded from the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal hit (step B125). Then, the loaded pointer is saved in the normal control pointer area per ordinary figure (step B126), the ordinary figure game processing timer is cleared (step B127), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a pay-per-use prize exceeding the upper limit value during the normal hit state, the hit end value is saved in the middle control processing pointer area at that time, and the normal hit state is not complete. Let it finish.

  Further, when it is determined in step B121 that the map is not being hit (step B121; N), if it is determined in step B122 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; N), or step B124. When it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B124; N), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure usual process (step B9) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, in the usual figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of usual figure hold is 0 (step B131). If the number of usual figure hold is 0 (step B131; Y), The normal process transition setting process 1 (step B152) is performed, and the normal process is terminated. In addition, when the usual figure hold number is not 0 (step B131; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM common figure random number storage area (for hold number 1) (step B132), and the usual figure change display game is executed. It is determined whether the probability of the hit result is a normal high probability that is higher than usual, that is, whether the time is short (step B133).

  When it is not the time of the normal high probability (step B133; N), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value that is the determination value at the time of the normal low probability (step B134). If the value of the winning random number does not match the low probability determination value (step B134; N), the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), and the shift stop symbol number is set in the normal stop symbol (step B135). B136), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common figure is cleared to 0 (step B141). On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value (step B134; Y), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139), and the hit stop symbol number is set to the normal stop symbol. (Step B140), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (Step B149).

  In step B133, when the normal probability is high (step B133; Y), the high probability lower limit determination in which the value of the hit random number is a lower limit value among a plurality of consecutive determination values used at the time of the normal probability. If the value of the hit random number is not less than the high probability lower limit determination value (step B137; N), a plurality of consecutive determinations to be used when the hit random number value is normally high probability It is determined whether the value is larger than the high probability upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value (step B138).

  If the value of the hit random number is not larger than the high probability upper limit determination value (step B138; N), that is, if it is a win, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139) and the hit stop symbol is hit by the normal stop symbol A number is set (step B140), and the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (step B141). Further, when the value of the hit random number is less than the high probability lower limit determination value at Step B137 (Step B137; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value at Step B138 (Step B138; Y ), That is, in the case of a deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), the deviation stop symbol number is set in the usual figure stop symbol (step B136), and the random number storage area per ordinary figure (holding number 1) Is cleared to 0 (step B141). That is, the determination value that determines that the hit of the normal figure is the same when the values of the hit random numbers coincide with each other is a single value when the normal figure has a low probability, and a plurality of continuous values when the normal figure has a high probability.

  After clearing the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per usual figure to 0 (step B141), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B142). Then, a decorative common figure variation pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol is prepared (step B143), and a command setting process (step B144) is performed. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect corresponding to the common map display game on the display device 41 or the like.

  After that, the random number storage area per usual figure is shifted (step B145), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B146), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B147). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game related to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the reserved number 1 I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, it is determined whether the power transmission support is in progress (during the short-time state) (step B148). If the power transmission support is not in progress (step B148; N), the fluctuation time when there is no power transmission support (for example, 10 seconds) ) Is set (step B149). Further, when the power transmission support is in progress (step B148; Y), a normal map change time (for example, 1 second) at the time of power transmission support is set (step B150). Then, the normal chart process transition setting process (step B151) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Usual map transition setting process 1]
FIG. 73 shows the normal daily process transition setting process 1 (step B152) in the above normal normal process. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B161), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B161). B162). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B163), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 74 shows the process transition setting process (step B151) during the normal map change in the above normal map normal process. In the process for setting the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” is set as a process number for shifting to the process for changing the normal map (step B171), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B171). Step B172). Thereafter, a signal related to the start of the normal map change display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B173), and a changing flag indicating that the normal figure change display game is changing is saved in the normal figure change control flag area. (Step B174). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the general display indicator, is saved in the general flashing control timer area (step B175), and the transition processing setting process for the normal map change process is performed. finish.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process during normal map change (step B10) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the normal map changing process, a general map display process transition setting process (step B180) is performed. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the normal map display process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the general map display process (step B181). Is saved in the usual game process number area (step B182). After that, a general map display time (for example, 0.6 seconds) that is a display time of the result of the general map change display game on the general map display is set (step B183), and the normal map display time is set as the general game display Save in the timer area (step B184). Further, a signal related to the end of the normal change is saved in the test signal output data area (step B185), and a stop flag indicating that the normal change display game is stopped is saved in the normal change control flag area ( In step B186), the normal diagram display process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B11) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the process for displaying a normal map, first, a hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal process is loaded (step B201), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (Step B202), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (Step B203).

  When the hit flag is not hit information (step B203; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B212) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated. This normal / normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B203; Y), it is determined whether or not the power transmission support is being performed (during the time saving state) (step B204).

  If the normal power support is not in progress (step B204; N), the normal power open time (for example, 100 ms) when there is no general power support is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B205). In addition, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B206), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no general power support is saved. Save in the upper limit area of control pointer per figure (step B207). Thereby, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the normal operation state is set, and for example, it is possible to open twice. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B211) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the power transmission support is in progress (step B204; Y), the power transmission release time (for example, 1352 ms) at the time of power transmission support is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B208). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during the normal call (step B209), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved to the normal map. Save in the middle control pointer upper limit area (step B210). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the short-time state is set, and for example, it is possible to open four times. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B211) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
FIG. 77 shows a process transition setting process (step B211) during the normal map in the above-described normal map display process. In this normal process transition setting process, first, “3” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal process (step B221), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B222). After that, a signal related to the hitting of the normal map display game and a signal related to the start of the normal operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B223), and the general electric signal is output to drive (turn on) the general electric solenoid. On data is saved in the solenoid output data area (step B224).

  Further, the information on the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B225), and the normal power illegality for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 during the general power fraud monitoring period. The information on the winning number area is cleared (step B226). Then, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B227), and the normal process transition setting process is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal hit process (step B12) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the normal processing per normal map, first, the control pointer during normal map is loaded and prepared (step B301), and the value of the loaded normal control pointer per normal map is controlled during the normal map control. It is determined whether or not the value in the pointer upper limit value area (the value at the end of hitting) has been reached (step B302).

  If the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (step B302; N), the control pointer during the normal map is updated by +1 (step B303), A general electric operation transition setting process (step B304) is performed, and the normal process is terminated. Further, when the value of the control pointer during the normal map reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (the value of the hit end) (step B302; Y), the process control pointer during the normal map in step B303. Without performing the process of updating (+1) the area, the normal power operation transition setting process (step B304) is performed, and the normal hit process is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
FIG. 79 shows the normal power operation transition setting process (step B304) in the above-described normal process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer. In this normal power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B311).

  If the value of the control pointer is 0, 3, 5, or 7, the process proceeds to step B312 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The waiting time after closing (for example, 2800 ms or 1000 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B312), and the off data is set in the general power solenoid output data area to turn off the general power solenoid 37c ( Step B313), the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is 1, 4, 6, or 8, the process proceeds to step B314 to control the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The normal power release time (for example, 100 ms, 5200 ms, or 1352 ms), which is the open time of 37, is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B314), and the normal power solenoid output is used to turn on the general power solenoid 37c. On data is set in the data area (step B315), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 2 or 9, the process goes to step B316 to complete the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B13). Then, “4” is set as the process number (step B316). Then, this processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B317), and the ordinary electric ball remaining time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B318). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B319), and the general electric operation transition setting process is ended.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, an end process shift setting process (step B400) is performed. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the universal chart end process transition setting process, first, a process number “5” related to the universal chart end process is set (step B401), and the process number is set to the regular game process. Save in the number area (step B402).

  Thereafter, the ordinary ending time is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B403), and a signal related to the end of the operation of the ordinary variation winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data region (step B404). The normal power count number area for counting the number of winnings to 37 is cleared (step B405). Then, the normal control pointer area is cleared (step B406), the normal control pointer upper limit value area is cleared (step B407), and the normal figure end process transition setting process ends.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B14) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the normal figure end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B500) is performed. As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B501), and the process number is set as the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B502).

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the normal game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B503), and a flag for specifying the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (flag during fraud monitoring period) is monitored. Save in the period flag area (step B504), and the usual process transition setting process 2 ends.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the segment LED editing process, first, a general chart hold number table in which a display mode on the general map hold display is defined is set (step S501), and display data corresponding to the general map hold number is displayed. Is acquired and saved in the segment area of the usual figure hold display (step S502). Next, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined is set (step S503), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 1 hold display is obtained. The data is saved in the segment area of the container (step S504).

  Thereafter, a special figure 2 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined is set (step S505), and display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired to obtain the special figure 2 hold indicator. Are saved in the segment area (step S506). Furthermore, a round display LED display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (step S507), and display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area of the round display unit ( Step S508).

  Next, a game state display table in which display modes on the first game state display unit 57 and the second game state display unit 58 are defined is set (step S509), and display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired. Are saved in the segment area of each game state display section (step S510). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the high probability notification flag related to notification that the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state at the time of power failure recovery (step S511). If the high-probability notification flag is on (step S511; Y), that is, if the high-probability state is being notified, the segment LED editing process is terminated. If the high probability notification flag is not on (step S511; N), the off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area of the third gaming state display unit (step S512), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. To do.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). Is on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism is detected (step S601). If the magnet sensor is on (step S601; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 to determine whether the timer has expired. Determination is made (step S603).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value is set. Save in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (step S601; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud notification time is reached. Is updated by -1 if the magnet fraud notification timer that prescribes is not 0 (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610; Y), that is, when the time has been up or when the time has already expired, and when the fraud notification period has ended, If not, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

  And when the prepared magnet fraud flag corresponds with the value of a magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), a magnet fraud monitoring process is complete | finished. If the values do not match (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), command setting processing is performed (step S615), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing is terminated. .

[Radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a, the radio wave is monitored. It is determined whether the sensor 62 is on, that is, whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

  Then, a radio fraud notification command is prepared (step S703), a radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step S704), and it is determined whether the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area. (Step S709). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, if the radio wave sensor is not on (step S701; N), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, -1 is updated unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is 0 (step S701). S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step S706).

  When the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S706; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or when the time has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period ends, If not, a command for terminating radio fraud notification is prepared (step S707), a radio fraud cancel flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step S708), and the prepared radio fraud flag is a value in the radio fraud flag area. (Step S709).

  If the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the radio fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step S709; N), the prepared radio fraud flag is saved in the radio fraud flag area (step S710), command setting processing is performed (step S711), and radio fraud monitoring processing is terminated. .

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S104), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107), and the magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S111), the information collection terminal and game Creates information to be output to an external device such as a field internal management device or a test firing test device and sets it in an output buffer.

  As shown in FIG. 85, in the external information editing process, first, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S801) for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start opening signal for editing a winning opening winning signal. Edit processing (step S802) is performed. Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not 0, -1 is updated (step S803). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (step S804).

  When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (step S804; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area ( Step S805). On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not 0 (step S804; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the on data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S806). Thereafter, processing for setting information according to the error state and the security state is performed.

  In the process of setting information according to the error state or the security state, first, a security signal for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like. If the control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S807). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808).

  When the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step S808; N), that is, when the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the gaming machine error status signal Is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  Further, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, a glass frame open error is occurring (step S809; Y), and the front frame An open error is occurring (step S810; Y), a lower prize winning fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), an upper winning prize fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), and an ordinary electric power fraud is occurring (step S813; Y) ), When the magnet fraud is occurring (step S814; Y) or radio wave fraud is occurring (step S815; Y), the ON signal of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the gaming machine error state The signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Y) and no error has occurred (steps S809 to S815; N), the off-data of the security signal is used as external information. The data is saved in the output data area (step S816), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S801) in the external information editing process described above will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step S823).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step S823; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step S824), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is output. The control timer initial value is saved (step S825). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S827), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step S823; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S823). S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step S822; N), it is determined whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S826). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S826; Y), the process proceeds to step S827. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S826; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step S802) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832). If the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the start port signal output count is 0 (step S833).

  If the start port signal output count is not 0 (step S833; N), the start port signal output count is updated by -1 (step S834), and the start port signal output control timer initial value is entered in the start port signal output control timer area. Is saved (step S835). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal ( For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the start port signal editing process is terminated. If the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S838). Then, the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (step S832; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). Note that the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S836; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S838), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 88 shows the main functions of the effect control device 300. The game control device 100 includes a command transmission connector 141 serving as a first connection connector for transmitting various information to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 receives various information transmitted from the game control device 100. For this purpose, a command receiving connector 328 serving as a second connection connector is provided. The game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are connected via this connector, so that various information can be transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. The production control device 300 controls the game based on this information.

  The RTC 338 includes a calendar function unit 338 a that manages the date and day of the week, and a clock function unit 338 b that manages the current time, and can output these pieces of information to the CPU 311. In the production control device 300, processing such as changing the production mode of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed based on the information from the RTC 338. Further, based on information from the RTC 338, a process of changing the model by changing the content information that defines the production mode is also performed.

  A control program and control data are stored in the PROM 321 which is a nonvolatile ROM. The PROM 321 has a control information storage unit 321a that stores information for controlling a decoration special figure variation display game and effects as a storage unit for storing control data; The distribution information initial value storage unit 321b that stores the initial value of information for selecting an effect and the history information initial value storage unit 321c that stores the initial value of information related to the change condition of the effect mode and the like are provided.

  In the control information storage unit 321a, change pattern control information for controlling the decoration special figure change display game, notice effect control information for controlling the notice and effect, and default information which is information for setting data in the FeRAM 323 A setting value table is stored. In addition, the distribution information initial value storage unit 321b stores variation pattern distribution information (variation pattern selection table) for selecting a variation pattern that is a variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game based on a command from the game control device 100. Etc.) and initial values of the notice effect distribution information (notice group table, notice detail table, etc.) for selecting the notice and the effect are stored.

  Further, the history information initial value storage unit 321c stores an initial value of hall setting information that can be set for each amusement shop, unique information (ID data) of a control program, model information that is information indicating a model, jackpot Type information corresponding to specifications such as probability values, and initial values of production mode release related information, which is information for setting executable productions, are stored.

  The FeRAM 323 is a non-volatile RAM that can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. In this FeRAM 323, a control information storage unit 323a capable of storing information for controlling a decoration special figure variation display game, effects, and the like as a storage unit for storing control data related to game effect control, and a decoration special figure A distribution information storage unit 323b capable of storing information for selecting a variation mode, a notice, and an effect of the variable display game, and a history information storage unit 323c capable of storing information related to model setting are provided.

  The CPU 311 controls the game based on the control program and control data stored in the PROM 321 and the control data stored in the FeRAM 323. That is, the CPU 311 includes arithmetic processing means for performing control related to the game effect control according to the control program and control data stored in the nonvolatile ROM (PROM 321) and the control data stored in the nonvolatile RAM (FeRAM 323). Eggplant.

  The information read from the PROM 321 can be stored in the FeRAM 323, and the information read from the PROM 321 is stored in the corresponding storage unit of the FeRAM 323. The variation pattern control information read from the control information storage unit 321a is stored in the variation pattern control information storage unit 323a1, and the notice effect control information read from the control information storage unit 321a is stored in the notice effect control information storage unit 323a2. Is done.

  The initial value of the variation pattern distribution information read from the distribution information initial value storage unit 321b is stored in the variation pattern distribution information storage unit 323b1, and the advance notice read from the distribution information initial value storage unit 321b. The initial value of the effect distribution information is stored in the notice effect distribution information storage unit 323b2. The initial value of the hole setting information read from the history information initial value storage unit 321c is stored in the hole setting information storage unit 323c1, and the unique information and model information read from the history information initial value storage unit 321c are The initial value of the effect mode release related information stored in the model information storage unit 323c2 and read from the history information initial value storage unit 321c is stored in the effect mode release related information storage unit 323c3.

  Next, control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control apparatus 300 will be described. The control process by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes a main process shown in FIG. 89 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 89, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), the CPU is initialized (step C2), the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). . Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7).

  Thereafter, the ID data (unique information) in the control ROM (PROM 321) is compared with the backup ID data (unique information) stored in the FeRAM 323 (step C8), and it is determined whether they match (step C9). . If the two match (step C9; Y), the process proceeds to step C13. If the two do not match (step C9; N), the contents of the backup RAM (FeRAM 323) are all cleared as an initialization process of the FeRAM 323 (step C10), and an initial value is set in the backup RAM (step C11). . Then, the ID data in the control ROM is written in the backup RAM (step C12), and the process proceeds to step C13.

  As a result, when the control data stored in FeRAM 323 is control data stored in a control program different from the control program stored in PROM 321, the control data is initialized, and the control data stored and held in FeRAM Can prevent malfunction. For example, when the data in the PROM 321 is updated during the development of a gaming machine, or when the PROM 321 is replaced in a reuse system, the old control program data stored in the FeRAM 323 is read inconsistently. However, it is possible to prevent malfunction by performing initialization when the unique information is collated and does not match.

  Thereafter, the hall setting value data stored in the FeRAM 323 and stored in the FeRAM 323 is stored in the RAM 322 as the player setting data, which is the data set by the game store, such as the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and the settings in the power saving state (step C13 ). When the FeRAM 323 is not initialized, the hall setting value data set by the game store and stored in the FeRAM 323 is stored in the RAM 322. When the initialization of the FeRAM 323 is performed, the initial value of the hole setting value data stored in the PROM 321 is written in the FeRAM 323, so that the initial value of the hole setting value data is stored in the RAM 322. Note that the brightness and volume of the LED can be changed by the player according to his / her preference, and the player setting data is updated in accordance with the change.

  FIG. 90 shows an overview of the processing from step C8 to step C12. In step C8, the CPU 311 (1) reads the ID from the PROM 321 that forms the control ROM, and (2) reads the ID from the FeRAM 323 that forms the backup RAM, and (3) compares the two. In this example, the ID read from the PROM 321 is 1234h, the ID read from the FeRAM 323 is 0000h, and it is determined that they do not match (step C9; N). As a result, the processes of steps C10 to C12 are performed, and (4) the initial values of the ID and control data stored in the PROM 321 are written in the FeRAM 323. The initial values written here include control information, distribution information initial values, and history information initial values.

  Note that such initialization processing is mainly performed when the power is turned on for the first time when the PROM 321 or the FeRAM 323 is replaced in the reuse operation of the gaming machine in the factory or when the new power control device 300 is turned on for the first time. .

  That is, the CPU 311 serves as a determination unit that determines whether the unique information stored in the nonvolatile ROM (PROM 321) matches the unique information stored in the nonvolatile RAM (FeRAM 323) every time the power is turned on. In addition, the CPU 311 includes initialization means for performing initialization by setting the control data and unique information stored in the nonvolatile ROM (PROM 321) to the control data and unique information stored in the nonvolatile RAM (FeRAM 323). Eggplant. The unique information (ID) only needs to be unique for each control program. For example, a program version number, a program checksum value, a program update date and time, etc. may be used in addition to a numerical value arbitrarily set. it can.

  Based on the above, the control program and control data related to the effect control of the game, the non-volatile ROM (PROM 321) that stores unique information that differs for each control program, and the stored contents can be retained even if power is not supplied during a power failure. There is a non-volatile RAM (FeRAM 323) capable of storing control data related to the game effect control, a control program and control data stored in the non-volatile ROM, and a game according to the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM. Arithmetic processing means (CPU 311) for performing control related to the production control, and each time the power is turned on, the arithmetic processing means includes the unique information stored in the nonvolatile ROM and the unique information stored in the nonvolatile RAM. Determination means (CPU 311) for determining whether the information matches, control data and unique information stored in the nonvolatile RAM And initialization means (CPU 311) that performs initialization by setting control data and unique information stored in the nonvolatile ROM, and the unique information stored in the nonvolatile ROM and the nonvolatile information by the determination means If it is determined that the unique information stored in the random RAM matches, the initialization unit retains the control data and unique information stored in the non-volatile RAM without performing initialization, and the determination unit stores the non-volatile information. If it is determined that the unique information stored in the ROM and the unique information stored in the non-volatile RAM do not match, the initialization means performs initialization.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that stores control data in game control in a RAM and performs game control based on the control data stored in the RAM (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-925). In conventional gaming machines, it may be possible to back up the RAM. However, if the control program is changed, the control data stored in the RAM may not correspond to the control program and may malfunction. is there. However, according to the above-described configuration, when the control data stored in the nonvolatile RAM is control data stored in a control program different from the control program stored in the nonvolatile ROM, the control data is Since initialization is performed, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to control data stored in the nonvolatile RAM.

  Returning to FIG. 89, the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C13 is performed, and then the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C14). Next, an effect button input process (step C15) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 is read in the timer interrupt process. In this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25, a process of changing the effect content is performed.

  Then, hall / player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as setting of a changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C16). Next, a model switching process (step C17) for switching the model based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is performed, and an effect mode management process (step C18) for managing the types of effects that can be performed is performed. Thereafter, a random number update process (step C19) is performed to update a random number that determines details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game, and a received command check process (step C19) that analyzes and responds to a command from the game control device 100 C20).

  Next, an effect display editing process (step C21) is performed, and the end of preparation for the drawing command is set (step C22). In the effect display editing process, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a frame switching timing (step C23). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching). If it is determined in step C23 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C23; N), the process of step C23 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C23 that it is the frame switching timing (step C23; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C24).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C25) for performing control related to the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C26) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18. ), A movable body control process (step C27) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board rendering device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C14).

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
FIG. 91 shows the hall / player setting mode process (step C16) in the main process described above. In this hall / player setting mode process, first, it is determined whether or not the hall setting mode is in a state where information is set on the game store side (step C31). When the hall setting mode is in effect, the hall setting mode flag is set, and whether or not the hall setting mode is in can be determined by the presence or absence of this flag. If it is in the hole setting mode (step C31; Y), the process proceeds to step C36. If not in the hole setting mode (step C31; N), it is determined whether the player is in the player setting mode in which information is set (step C32).

  When in the player setting mode, the player setting mode flag is set, and whether or not the player setting mode is in can be determined by the presence or absence of this flag. When the player setting mode is in effect (step C32; Y), the process proceeds to step C49. If not in the player setting mode (step C32; N), it is determined whether a start condition for the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C33). The start condition of the hall setting mode here is, for example, that the effect button 25 is pressed twice while waiting for a customer and the front frame 12 is opened. When the start condition of the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C33; Y), the screen drawing start of the hole setting mode is set (step C34), and the hole setting mode flag is set (step C35).

  Thereafter, a hall volume adjustment process (step C36) for setting the changeable range of the sound volume based on the operation input and a hall LED brightness adjustment process (step C37) for setting the changeable range of the LED brightness based on the operation input are performed. In these processes, both the upper limit value and the lower limit value may be set, or only one of them may be set. The player can adjust the volume and the brightness of the LED within the range set here. Further, liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (step C38) for setting the liquid crystal brightness based on the operation input, and power saving setting processing (step C38) for setting the power saving state to be shifted when the game is not performed for a predetermined time. C39). In this power saving setting process (step C39), the setting of whether or not to enable the power saving setting when the game is not performed for a predetermined time and the volume, LED luminance, and liquid crystal luminance at the time of power saving setting are set for each hole. It can be set to. In addition to the above settings, it may be possible to set whether or not to move the movable accessory during power saving. Then, it is determined whether there has been a setting confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in these processes (step C40).

  If there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C40; N), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated. If there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C40; Y), it is determined whether the input is a confirmation operation input at the factory setting (step C41). The confirmation operation input includes a confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in the processes from Steps C36 to C39 and a confirmation operation input for returning to the factory default setting, and it is determined which one has been performed.

  If it is not a finalizing operation input at the factory setting (step C41; N), that is, if it is a finalizing operation input for confirming the information set in the processing from step C36 to C39, the processing from step C36 to C39 The determined hole setting data is written in the backup RAM as the determined information as the determined information (step C43). If the input is a definite operation at the factory setting (step C41; Y), the factory setting process (step C42) is performed, and the information set in the processes from steps C36 to C39 is discarded. The initial value at the time of shipment is set as the determined information, and the determined hole setting data is written in the backup RAM (step C43). As a result, the initial setting values (volume, LED luminance, and liquid crystal luminance setting values) stored in the PROM 321 are stored in the FeRAM 323.

  In the process of writing the determined hole setting data into the backup RAM (FeRAM 323) (step C43), information is written into the hole setting information storage unit 324c1 of the history information storage unit 323c. Thereafter, the end of screen drawing in the hole setting mode is set (step C43), the hole setting mode flag is cleared (step C44), and the hole / player setting mode process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the start condition for the hole setting mode is not satisfied (step C33; N), it is determined whether the start condition for the player setting mode is satisfied (step C46). Here, the start condition of the hall setting mode is, for example, that the effect button 25 is pressed once during a waiting state in which the special figure change display game and the normal figure change display game are not executed. If this player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (step C46; N), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated. If the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (step C46; Y), the player setting mode screen drawing start is set (step C47), and the player setting mode flag is set (step C48).

  Then, the player volume adjustment process (step C49) for changing the volume based on the operation input within the changeable range set in the hall volume adjustment process (step C36), and the change set in the hall LED adjustment process (step C37). A player LED brightness adjustment process (step C50) is performed for changing the brightness of the LED based on the operation input within the possible range. Thereafter, it is determined whether there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C51). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C51: N), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated.

  When there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C51: Y), the information set in step C36 or C37 is stored in the RAM 322 as player setting data, and then the end of screen drawing in the player setting mode is set. (Step C52), the player setting mode flag is cleared (Step C53), and the hall / player setting mode process is terminated. As a result, the brightness and volume of the LED set by the player are changed.

  In addition, the drawing update setting accompanying the operation input after entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed in the effect button input process (step C15). Further, the player setting data is stored in the RAM 322, but may be stored in the FeRAM 323. Further, the time is acquired from the RTC 338 at the time of power-off and stored in the FeRAM 322, the power-off time is calculated from the time acquired from the RTC 338 at the time of power-on, and the player setting data stored in the FeRAM 323 according to the power-off time Whether or not to store the hole set value data may be determined. For example, if the power cut-off time is within a predetermined time, the hall setting value data is not stored in the player setting data, but is maintained as it is, and the power is cut off to recover from a short interruption or error. Then, it is possible to prevent the player setting data from being reset.

[Model change processing]
FIG. 92 shows the model switching process (step C17) in the main process described above. In this model switching process, first, it is determined whether the model has been switched based on the presence / absence of the model switching completed flag (step C71). If the model has been switched (step C71; Y), the model switching process ends. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the model can be switched only once, so that the model switching process is not performed if the model has already been switched.

  If the model has not been switched (step C71; N), it is determined whether the date / time has been confirmed based on the presence / absence of the switching date / time confirmed flag (step C72). If the date and time have been confirmed (step C72; Y), the model switching process is terminated. If the date / time has not been confirmed (step C72; N), the switching date / time confirmed flag is set (step C73). The switching date / time confirmation flag is a process of saving the initial value at the time of power-on in the area to be initialized in the main process (step C7) so that the switching date / time is confirmed only once after the gaming machine is turned on. The initial value is cleared when it is saved.

  Thereafter, an RTC check process for acquiring date / time information from the RTC 338 is performed (step C74), and it is determined whether there is an RTC error flag that is set when the information cannot be normally acquired from the RTC 338 in the RTC check process (step C74). C75). If there is this RTC error flag (step C75; Y), the model switching process is terminated. If there is no RTC error flag (step C75; N), it is determined whether there is a model switching date and time setting that defines the model switching date and time (step C76).

  If there is no model switching date and time setting (step C76; N), the model switching process is terminated. The model switching date / time setting is stored in the FeRAM 323, but the value of the state in which the model switching date / time setting is not stored is erroneously read out as the model switching date / time setting, and the model is switched. Try to prevent. If there is a model switching date and time setting (step C76; Y), date information is read from the RTC (step C77), and it is determined whether the read date and time has passed the model switching date and time (step C78).

  If the read date / time has not passed the model switching date / time (step C78; N), the model switching process is terminated. If the read date and time has passed the model switching date and time (step C78; Y), various settings for switching the model contents are performed (step C79), the model switched flag is set (step C80), and the model switching is performed. The process ends. The model switching date and time may be, for example, a date on the calendar, or a date from the date of introduction of the gaming machine to the amusement store.

  FIG. 93 shows model setting information. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game effect modes corresponding to the first model and the second model are stored in advance in the FeRAM 323 storing information read from the PROM 321 and the PROM 321. And the setting value of the model switching setting information of each production mode is set according to the setting value of the content information that defines the production mode, and which production mode is used.

  Before the model switching, the setting value of the content information is set to 1 which is a value corresponding to the first model, and accordingly, the setting value for the rendering mode such as background information and symbol information is also set to the first model. The corresponding value is set to 1 and is set to play a game using the production mode corresponding to the first model among the production modes stored in the PROM 321 and the FeRAM 323. Then, by performing processing for performing various settings for switching the model content (step C79), the setting value of the content information is changed to 2, which is a value corresponding to the second model, and accordingly, the setting value for the rendering mode Is also set to 2 which is a value corresponding to the second model, and is set so that the game is performed using the effect mode corresponding to the second model among the effect modes stored in the PROM 321 and the FeRAM 323. Note that at least the setting value of the content information is stored in the FeRAM 323 and is maintained even when the power is turned off.

  In this way, by making it possible to use different models with the passage of time with a single gaming machine, it is possible to suppress the effect of attracting customers over time and to generate new means of attracting customers. . The number of switchable models is not limited as long as it is two or more. Further, by switching the model by referring to different information while using one control program, it is possible to reduce duplicate data.

  That is, the effect control device 300 (PROM 321 or FeRAM 323) serves as an effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, different models of effect modes) as game effect modes. In addition, the production control device 300 (CPU 311) serves as content information setting means that can set any one of a plurality of pieces of content information that defines a game production aspect, and content information set by the content information setting means. Accordingly, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode that can be selected from a plurality of types of effect modes is provided.

  Further, the production control device 300 (PROM 321 or FeRAM 323) has a production mode change time storage means capable of storing information (model switching date and time setting) indicating the date and time when the content information is changed, and the production control device 300 (CPU 311) Based on the information indicated by the timing means and the production mode change storage means, it is determined that the content information change determination means determines whether or not to change the content information, and the content information change determination means determines to change the content information. In this case, content information changing means for changing the set content information to different content information is provided.

  For example, in the model switching setting information, when the setting value is 1 corresponding to the first model for the symbol information that is the information related to the identification information used in the decorative special figure variation display game, it is shown in FIG. When the design and arrangement are used and the setting value is 2 corresponding to the second model, the design and arrangement shown in FIG. 94B are used. That is, the production control device 300 serves as identification information setting means for setting a plurality of identification information in accordance with the content information set by the content information setting means.

  In the control program of the production control device 300, for the default identification information that is the symbol displayed on the display device 41 when the power is turned on, the symbol number 9 in the left variation display region, the symbol number 10 in the middle variation display region, and the right variation display. Control is performed so that the symbol number 11 is displayed in the area. That is, the production control device 300 serves as information display means for displaying predetermined identification information as default identification information on the display device 41 when the power is turned on from among a plurality of pieces of identification information set by the identification information setting means.

  In the symbol array shown in FIG. 94, the symbols are arranged so that the model name information corresponding to the content information is displayed by the power-on display. The symbol of the first model shown in FIG. The symbol is arranged so that “ABC”, which is the model name, is displayed in the array, and “Iroha”, which is the model name, is displayed in the symbol array of the second model shown in FIG. 94 (b). It is arranged. Accordingly, the set content information (model) can be confirmed by confirming the default identification information displayed when the power is turned on.

  Further, in the model switching setting information, the set value is 1 corresponding to the first model for the variation pattern selection table group for selecting the variation pattern of the decoration special figure variation display game according to the command from the game control device 100. In some cases, the variation pattern selection table group shown in FIGS. 95A to 95D is used, and in the case where the set value is 2 corresponding to the second model, FIGS. 95E to 95H are used. A variation pattern selection table group shown is used.

  The game control device 100 sets a variation pattern including the variation time of the special figure variation display game, and transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the effect control device 300. The setting of the variation pattern is performed regardless of the model setting in the effect control device 300. As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) to 96 (d), the game control apparatus 100 includes a variation pattern table group divided by the result of the special figure variation display game and the starting memory number (holding number) at the start of the game. In addition, it is possible to set a variation pattern and a variation time defined in the variation pattern table corresponding to the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game.

  For example, in the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is out of order and the starting memory number at the start of the game is 1 or 2, the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 96 (a) can be selected and selected. A variation pattern command and a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern are set. Assuming that no reach is selected as the variation pattern, the variation time is 12 seconds, and a command having MODE of C0H and ACTION of 01H is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the variation pattern command.

  In addition, in the special figure variation display game in which the result is out of order and the number of starting memories at the start of the game is three, a variation pattern as shown in FIG. 96 (b) can be selected, and the selected variation pattern A variation pattern command and a variation time corresponding to the are set. Assuming that no reach is selected as the variation pattern, the variation time is 8 seconds, and a command having MODE of C0H and ACTION of 01H is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the variation pattern command.

  In the production control device 300, the variation pattern command, the special figure variation display game result, the variation time is grasped from the start memory number (holding number) at the start of the game, and according to the set value of the model switching setting information, The variation pattern of the variation display game is set using the variation pattern selection table group shown in FIGS. 95 (a) to 95 (d) or the variation pattern selection table group shown in FIGS. 95 (e) to 95 (h). That is, the effect control device 300 (CPU 311) serves as an effect mode selection unit that selects an effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern set by the variation pattern setting unit from among a plurality of effect modes set by the effect mode setting unit.

  Each variation pattern selection table group shown in FIG. 95 is the same as the variation pattern table group of the game control apparatus 100 shown in FIG. 96, and the result of the special figure variation display game and the number of start memories (holding number) at the start of the game. It is divided by. In addition, for each variation pattern command transmitted from the game control device 100, a variation pattern of at least one decoration special figure variation display game is defined. Therefore, regardless of which variation pattern selection table group is used, it is possible to set the variation pattern of the decorative special figure variation display game for all the variation patterns of the special figure variation display game that can be set by the game control apparatus 100. Become. Thereby, even when changing the content information to change the selectable presentation mode, it is not necessary to change the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the game control device 100.

  The variation pattern selection table group shown in FIGS. 95 (a) to 95 (d) and the variation pattern selection table group shown in FIGS. 95 (e) to 95 (h) are different in the type of variation pattern set for the same variation pattern command. To make it a different model. For example, for a special figure variable display game in which the result is out of order and the starting memory number at the start of the game is 1 or 2, when a command with MODE of C5H and ACTION of 03H is received as the change pattern command, the first If the model is set, SP reach A is selected from FIG. 95 (a), and if the second model is set, SP reach 1 is selected from FIG. 95 (e). SP reach A and SP reach 1 are fluctuation patterns having the same fluctuation time of 20 seconds but different contents.

  In addition, for a special figure variable display game in which the result is out of order and the starting memory number is 1 or 2 at the start of the game, if a command with MODE of C0H and ACTION of 01H is received as a fluctuation pattern command, Either the no reach or N reach (short) can be selected as the change pattern of the special figure change display game. It suffices that at least one variation pattern of the decoration special figure variation display game can be set for one variation pattern command, but a plurality of variation patterns may be selected in association with each other as described above. Further, the number of variation patterns of the decorative special figure variation display game associated with one variation pattern command may be varied depending on the variation pattern selection table group.

  Based on the above, a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when a game result is a predetermined result, a game effect mode is defined in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player. Content information setting means (effect control device 300) capable of setting any one of the plurality of content information to be performed, and effect mode storage means (effect control device 300) for storing a plurality of types of effect modes as game effect modes In addition, according to the content information set by the content information setting unit, the production mode setting unit (production control device 300) for setting a production mode that can be selected from a plurality of types of production modes, and information indicating the current date and time The time measuring means (production control device 300) that can generate the information, and the production mode change storage means (production control that can store information indicating the date and time when the content information is changed 300), content information change determining means (effect control device 300) for determining whether or not to change the content information based on information indicated by the time measuring means and the effect mode change storing means, and the content information change determining means. If it is determined that the content information is to be changed, content information changing means (effect control device 300) for changing the set content information to different content information is provided.

  Here, the game effect mode includes an execution mode (fluctuation pattern) of a decoration game executed corresponding to the game, a display of characters and the like during the game, an operating mode of an accessory, a light emission mode such as sound and LED, etc. , Backgrounds, waiting images, etc.

  When adding an effect is a means of attracting customers, there is a problem that the effect of attracting customers decreases after the effect is added. However, according to the above-described configuration, the model itself is changed, so that it is possible to suppress the effect of attracting customers over time and to generate new attracting means.

  Further, a variation pattern setting means (game control device 100) for setting a variation pattern as a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations, and an effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern set by the variation pattern setting means are represented as an effect mode setting means ( An effect mode selection means (effect control device 300) for selecting from among a plurality of effect modes set by the effect control device 300), and the effect mode setting means can be selected according to the content information. As described above, the production mode is set so that at least one production mode can be selected for each of all the variation patterns that can be set by the variation pattern setting means. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the setting of the variation pattern even when changing the content information to change the selectable presentation mode.

  In addition, a display device 41 that displays a game is provided. The game is a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a variable manner, and then stops and displays identification information corresponding to the result. The content information setting means (the effect control device 300) In accordance with the set content information, the identification information setting means (production control device 300) for setting a plurality of identification information and the predetermined identification information among the plurality of identification information set by the identification information setting means by default identification Information display means (production control device 300) that displays information on the display device 41 when the power is turned on, and the information display means uses the identification information corresponding to the content information set in the content information setting means as default identification information. It will be displayed. Therefore, the set content information can be confirmed by confirming the default identification information displayed when the power is turned on.

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 97 shows the received command check process (step C20) in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C101). It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C102). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C102; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C102; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C103).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C104), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C105), and the command copy for the number of received commands is completed Is determined (step C106). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C106 that the command copy for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C106; N), the process returns to step C104. If it is determined that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C106; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C107), and the received command analysis process (step C108) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C109), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C100). If it is determined that command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C100; N), the process returns to step C107. If it is determined that the command analysis for the number of received commands has been completed (step C100; Y), the received command check process is terminated. As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 98 shows the received command analysis process (step C108) in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C112), and it is determined whether or not the MODE is in the normal range (step C113). When it is determined that MODE is in the normal range (step C113; Y), it is determined whether ACT is in the normal range (step C114). If it is determined that the ACT is in the normal range (step C114; Y), it is determined whether the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C115).

  If it is determined in step C113 that MODE is not in the normal range (step C113; N), if it is determined in step C114 that ACT is not in the normal range (step C114; N), or in step C115, for MODE. If it is determined that ACT is not a correct combination (step C115; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C115 that the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C115; Y), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C116). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C116; Y), the variable command processing (step C117) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C116 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C116; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C118). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C118; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C119) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C118 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C118; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the design command range (step C120). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C120; Y), symbol-related command processing (step C121) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C120 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (step C120; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as a pending number command and an error command. (Step C122). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single command (step C122; Y), the single command processing (step C123) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C122 that MODE is not in the range of the single command (step C122; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetch command (step C124). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch command (step C124; Y), prefetch command processing (step C125) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C124 that MODE is not in the range of the prefetch command (step C124; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the backup command (step C126). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the backup command (step C126; Y), the backup command processing (step C127) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C126 that MODE is not within the range of the backup command (step C126; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 99 shows the variable command process (step C117) in the received command analysis process described above. In this variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the type of the special figure variation display game is unconfirmed (step C131). This determination makes it possible to check whether a stop symbol command has been received before receiving the variation pattern command. Since the stop symbol command includes information on the type of the special symbol fluctuation display game (whether it is special graph 1 or special graph 2), if the stop symbol command can be received normally, the special symbol variation display game It is determined that the type of is not yet determined.

  When it is determined in this step C131 that the type of the special figure variation display game is unconfirmed (step C131; Y), the variation command processing is terminated. When it is determined that the type of the special figure variation display game is not yet determined (step C131; N), a variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step C132) is performed. In this variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the type of stop symbol command matches (matches) the variation pattern command. Thus, for example, when the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command type do not match, such as a combination of a variation pattern command of hit variation and a stop symbol command of the off symbol, it does not vary (specifically (Do not play the decoration special figure fluctuation display game).

  If the result of determination in step C132 is that the variation pattern command and stop symbol command type do not match (step C133; Y), the variation command processing is terminated. When the variation pattern command matches the type of the stop symbol command (step C133; N), the variation effect setting process (step C134) is performed to count the number of executions of the special diagram variation display game. The change counter is updated by +1 (step C135), and the change command processing is terminated.

[Variation production setting processing]
FIG. 100 shows the changing effect setting process (step C134) in the above-described changing command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, a variation pattern classification process (step C141) is performed, the entire notice information area is cleared (step C142), and a first-half variation notice lottery process (step C143) is performed. Next, as a result of the classification in step C141, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command is roughly classified into a variation pattern with no reach variation (step C144).

  If it is determined in step C144 that the variation pattern of the variation without reach is roughly classified (step C144; Y), the process proceeds to step C146. Further, when it is determined that the change pattern is not roughly divided into fluctuation patterns without reach (step C144; N), that is, when the change pattern based on the change pattern command is a change pattern of change with reach, the second half change notice lottery process (Step C145) is performed, and the process proceeds to Step C146.

  Then, the decoration stop symbol setting process (step C146) is performed, the change start setting process (step C147) is performed, and the first half change notice lottery process (step C143) or the second half change notice lottery process (step C145) is notified. It is determined whether a setting has been made (step C148). If no notice is set (step C148; N), the changing effect setting process is terminated. If there is a notice setting (step C148; Y), the set notice count is added to the total notice appearance count counter (step C149), and the variable effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of adding the set number of notices to the total notice appearance number counter (step C149), each of the notices set in the first-half changing notice lottery process (step C143) and the latter-half changing notice lottery process (step C145). Is added to the total notice appearance frequency counter as one notice. This makes it possible to count the number of notices executed.

[First half lottery notice lottery processing]
FIG. 101 shows the first-variation preliminary notice lottery process (step C143) in the above-described variable effect setting process. In the first half change notice lottery process, first, the first half notice group table 1 corresponding to the type of change pattern and the production mode is set (step C161), and a lottery for selecting a notice group for the notice effect at the start of change is selected. A notice group lottery process (step C162) is performed. Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, “no notice”, “PB (push button) notice”, “variation start notice”, “background change notice”, “PB notice + variation start notice”, “PB notice + A notice group is selected from “background change notice”, “title notice”, and “change start notice + background change notice”.

  If “no notice” is selected as a result of the lottery in step C162 (step C163; Y), information related to “no notice” is stored as normal performance information of the notice effect at the start of change, and the process of step C166 is performed. Migrate to On the other hand, as a result of the lottery in step C162, when a value other than “No notice” is selected (step C163; N), the production mode release related information and random numbers in the range corresponding to the lottery contents are prepared (step C164). . As will be described later, the production mode release related information is set according to the progress of the game, and the type of production that can appear (selectable) by setting the range of random numbers accordingly. I try to change it.

  Then, a notice detail lottery process (step C165) is performed for performing a lottery for selecting a notice pattern to appear at the start of fluctuation from the normal notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery of step C162, and step C166. Move on to processing. For example, when “background change notice” is selected in the lottery of step C162, a notice pattern to appear from a plurality of types of background change notices is selected, and information regarding the selected notice pattern is displayed at the start of fluctuation notice. Is stored as normal performance information. Further, when “title notice” for operating the rotating member 44a is selected, the selection range of the operation differs depending on whether or not the model is switched, and the second is selected when the model is not switched. An operation that does not include an operation that allows the player to visually recognize the side surface on which the model name is displayed is selected.

  After that, the first half notice group table 2 corresponding to the type of variation pattern, the production mode, etc. is set (step C166), and the notice group lottery process (step C167) for performing the lottery for selecting the notice group of the notice announcement before reach is performed. Do. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a notice group is selected from “step-up notice”, “conversation notice”, “title notice”, and “no notice”.

  As a result of the lottery in step C167, when “no notice” is selected (step C168; Y), information related to “no notice” is stored as the normal performance information of the pre-reach notice effect, and the first half change notice lottery The process ends. On the other hand, as a result of the lottery in step C167, when other than “No notice” is selected (step C168; N), the production mode release related information and random numbers in the range corresponding to the lottery contents are prepared (step C169). .

  Then, a preliminary announcement detailed lottery process (step C170) for performing a lottery to select a preliminary announcement pattern to appear before reach from the normal announcement patterns included in the preliminary announcement group selected in the lottery of step C167 is performed. The notice lottery process during change ends. For example, when “step-up notice” is selected in the lottery of step C166, a notice pattern to appear from a plurality of types of step-up notices having different progress stages and contents is selected, and the selected notice pattern is related to the selected notice pattern. The information is stored as normal performance information for the pre-reach notice performance.

[Lottery processing during the latter half of the change]
FIG. 102 shows the second-half fluctuation notice lottery process (step C145) in the above-described fluctuation effect setting process. In the latter-half fluctuation notice lottery process, first, a latter-half notice group table corresponding to the type of change pattern, the production mode, etc. is set (step C181), and a notice for performing a lottery to select a notice group for the notice notice effect during reach is selected. A group lottery process (step C182) is performed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a notice group is selected from “group notice”, “title notice”, and “no notice”.

  As a result of the lottery in step C182, when “no notice” is selected (step C183; Y), information related to “no notice” is stored as the normal performance information of the notice announcement during reach, and the notice lottery during the latter half of the change The process ends. If the result of the lottery in step C182 is selected other than “No notice” (step C183; N), the production mode release related information and random numbers in the range corresponding to the lottery content are prepared (step C169). .

  Then, a preliminary announcement detailed lottery process (step C185) for performing a lottery for selecting a preliminary notice pattern to appear in the reach from the normal notice patterns included in the preliminary notice group selected in the lottery of step C182 is performed. The notice lottery process during change ends. For example, when “group notice” is selected in the lottery of step C182, a notice pattern to appear from among a plurality of group notices having different contents is selected, and information on the selected notice pattern is used for the notice effect during reach. It is stored as normal performance information.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are two advance notice timings (at the start of the change, before reach) during the first half change, and that there is one advance notice timing during the second half change, the notice group lottery process is performed for each. Although configured, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of notice timings during the first half change or the second half change may be one time or a plurality of times.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, lottery effects can be executed even with a small amount of memory usage by performing lottery at each notice timing. For example, in the case where “notice group of notice effect at start of change” and “notice group of notice effect before reach” are selected in two lotteries as in the present embodiment, the notice group table used in the two lotteries is selected. As the storage area, an area corresponding to “the number of notice groups of the notice effect at the start of change” + “the number of notice groups of the notice effect before the reach” is required. On the other hand, when selecting “Advance notice group at the start of change” and “Advance notice group at the start of reach” in one lottery, “Advance notice group at the start of change” in the one lottery. One combination is selected from the notice group table that stores a plurality of combinations of "Pre-reach notice notice group". Therefore, the storage area of the notice group table used in the one lottery needs an area corresponding to “the number of notice groups of the notice effect at the start of change” × “the number of notice groups of the notice effect before the reach” × As the number of timings and the number of notice groups increase, the required area increases, so the memory usage increases. For this reason, it is preferable to perform the notice group lottery process at each notice timing from the viewpoint of reducing the memory usage.

  On the other hand, the notice group lottery process is performed corresponding to each notice timing, but the notice group of each notice timing may be selected by one notice group lottery process for a plurality of notice timings. In this way, it is possible to execute a large number of notice effects even with a small number of lotteries. That is, from the viewpoint of reducing the number of lotteries, it is preferable to select a plurality of notice groups in one notice group lottery process.

[Direction mode management processing]
FIG. 103 shows the effect mode management process (step C18) in the main process described above. In the effect mode management process, first, the total number of notices appearing as a result of counting the number of appearances of notices is loaded (step C201), and the number of total big hits as a result of counting the number of big hits is loaded (step C202). Further, the total number of special figure fluctuations, which is the counting result of the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game, is loaded (step C203), and the date / time information of the RTC is read (step C204).

  The total notice appearance count is counted by the process (step C149) of adding the set notice count to the total notice appearance count counter in the above-described variable effect setting process. The total jackpot number is counted by updating the total jackpot counter by +1 every time a fanfare command is received in the jackpot command process (step C119) in the received command analysis process. The total number of special figure fluctuations is counted in a process (step C135) of updating a total special figure fluctuation number counter that counts the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the variable command process.

  These constitute game parameters that are information relating to the progress of the game, and the effect control device 300 serves as a game parameter collecting means for collecting game parameters that are information relating to the result of the progress of the game. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game parameters are counted in units of one business day, but this period can be arbitrarily set.

  Thereafter, the release state of the effect (effect mode release related information) is set based on the various parameters (step C205). The various parameters include information from the above-described gaming parameters and information from the RTC, information indicating that the effect type set in step C210, which will be described later, has been set, and the like. The effect mode release related information is information for specifying an effect that can be executed from a plurality of effect modes, and this effect mode release related information includes the total notice appearance count, the total jackpot count, the total number of special figure changes, and the RTC date and time. It is set based on information, information indicating that the production type is set.

  It should be noted that the total notice appearance count, the total jackpot count, the total special figure fluctuation count, and the production mode release related information are stored in the FeRAM 323 and can be retained even when the power is shut off. In other words, the effect control device 300 is capable of specifying a predetermined (executable) effect mode out of a plurality of effect modes based on the game parameters collected by the game parameter collecting means (effect mode release related) Information setting means for setting (information).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a newly released (executable) effect (step C206). When there is no newly released effect (step C206; N), the process proceeds to step C208. If there is a newly released effect (step C206; Y), the display setting of the release notification display corresponding to the new release effect is performed (step C207), and the process proceeds to step C208.

  In step S208, it is determined whether or not it is an effect selectable state in which the player can select an effect mode that can be executed. The effect selectable state is, for example, a waiting state for customers. If it is not in the effect selectable state (step C208; N), the effect mode management process ends. If it is in the effect selectable state (step C208; Y), it is determined whether there is an effect selection operation that is a specific operation of the effect button 25 (step C209).

  When there is no effect selection operation (step C209; N), the effect mode management process ends. If there is an effect selection operation (step C209; Y), the effect type is changed to an effect type corresponding to the effect selection operation (step C210), and the effect mode management process is terminated. In the process of changing to the effect type corresponding to the effect selection operation (step C210), the setting of the effect mode release related information corresponding to the effect type and the information indicating that the effect type is set are set. Through the processing described above, it is possible to change the effects that can be executed by the progress of the game, the passage of time, and the player's operation. Note that the player's volume adjustment processing (step C49) performed when the player in steps C208 to C210 selects the effect type is in the player setting mode in the hall / player setting mode processing shown in FIG. ) Or player LED brightness adjustment processing (step C50).

  FIG. 104 shows conditions for changing the presentation mode release related information. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two types of game modes, a character A effect mode and a character B effect mode, are prepared, and the player can select one of the game modes. The character A effect mode is a game mode in which an effect mainly based on the addition of a variation pattern and a notice regarding the character A is performed. As shown in FIG. It is going to change. In addition, the character B effect mode is a game mode in which an effect mainly based on the addition of a variation pattern and a notice regarding the character B is performed. As shown in FIG. Etc. are changing.

  As the model content change condition, stepwise conditions from condition 1 to condition 8 are set. For example, the condition 1 is achieved by satisfying any one of the fact that the number of jackpots is 10 times, the number of notices is 6000 times, or the number of fluctuations is 3300 times in one business day. It can also be achieved by setting the number of introduction days, which is the number of days since the introduction of the gaming machine to the amusement store, to 7 days. When the condition 1 is achieved, for example, in the character A effect mode, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), SP reach A2 is added as a variation pattern of an executable decorative map variation display game and executed. A change to character A special background 2 is added as a possible notice.

  When condition 3 is achieved, SP2 reach A2 is added as a variation pattern of the executable special figure variation display game that can be executed, and a change that updates the character B normal background by +1 is added as an executable notice. The change to be updated by +1 is a change in which a stage is set for the background change and this stage is advanced by one stage. In addition, the conditions 1 and 2 are naturally achieved before the condition 3 is achieved, and the added variation pattern and notice are also executable. As described above, since a newly selectable production mode is added to the selectable production mode, the previous production mode does not appear and the effect of attracting customers is reduced. Can be prevented. In this way, since the selection range of the production mode is changed based on the collected game parameters, the customer collection effect by the customer collection means for changing the production mode is not limited to a specific player and can be effectively utilized. Become.

  In the case of the character A effect mode shown in FIG. 104 (a), only the character A effect type 1 mode can be set until the condition 4 is achieved. A production type 2 mode is added. By adding this effect type, there are a plurality of selectable effect types, and either a character A effect type 1 mode or a character A effect type 2 mode can be selected by an effect selection operation by the player.

  When the character A effect type 1 mode is selected, even if the condition 4 or later is achieved, the variation pattern or the notice added by achieving the condition 4 or later is not executable. In addition, when the character A effect type 2 mode is selected, in addition to the variation pattern and notice that can be executed in the character A effect type 1 mode, the model content change condition after condition 4 is achieved. Fluctuation patterns and notices can also be executed by achieving corresponding model content change conditions.

  This selection setting process is performed in steps C208 to C210 of the effect mode management process. And in the process (step C205) of setting the release state of the effect (effect mode release related information) based on the various parameters, the effect type specified by the information indicating that the effect type is set. Information indicating that the production type is set when the production mode selection range set by achieving the model content change condition with other parameters is wider than the production mode selection range. The selection range of the production mode in the designated production type is set.

  The character A effect mode and the character B effect mode differ in which one of the characters A and B is given priority in the order of the added variation pattern and notice. Therefore, when all the model content change conditions are achieved, the executable variation pattern and the notice are the same. For this reason, the state up to the stage where the predetermined model content change condition is achieved can be selected as one effect type, so that it can be returned to the selection range of the previous effect mode by changing the effect type, Since the appearance frequency of the character selected by the player can be returned to a high state, a game according to the player's preference can be performed.

  FIG. 105 shows an example of a table for selecting a notice during the first half change. In step C161 in the first-half change notice lottery process, the first-order notice group table 1 as shown in FIG. 105 (a) can be set. When the background change notice is selected in the notice group lottery process (step C162), in the process for preparing the random number in the range corresponding to the production mode release related information and the lottery contents (step C164), FIG. A random number to be used is prepared as shown in (c).

  The range of random values is set according to the production mode-related information, and the range of random values is set so that only selectable notice values can be included in the random value. It has become. For example, in the case of the character A effect type, in the initial state where none of the model content change conditions has been achieved, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), a notice pattern for updating the character A normal background by +1 or +2, and the character 950 random numbers from 0 to 949 are set so as to include only the judgment value of the notice pattern that changes to the A special background 1 and the notice pattern that changes to the character A intense heat background 1. As a result, the determination values of the other notice patterns are not included in the random number value, and therefore, other than the four notice patterns are not selected.

  In addition, when the condition 1 of the model content change condition is achieved, the random value range is set to include the judgment value of the notice pattern that changes to the character A special background 2 that is the added notice pattern. It becomes. Each time the model content change condition is achieved, the range of the random number value is changed so as to include the determination value of the added notice pattern. In other words, the production control device 300 serves as a random number generating means for generating a random value for selecting the production mode, and all the determinations associated with the production mode specified by the production release information (production mode release related information). Random value setting means for setting a value as a random number value that can be generated by the random number generation means.

  FIG. 106 shows a variation pattern of a special display variation display game that is added when the model content change condition is achieved. It is set so that at least one variation pattern can be selected for each variation pattern command that can be received even in the initial state where none of the model content change conditions is achieved. Thereby, even when changing the presentation mode release related information and changing the selectable presentation mode, it is not necessary to change the setting of the variation pattern in the game control device 100. Therefore, the added variation pattern is an option when a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is received.

  When a plurality of variation patterns can be selected for one variation pattern command, selection is made from among the selectable variation patterns using a random number. As the random number value used at this time, the range of the random number value may be set based on the presentation mode release related information so that only the determination value of the selectable variation pattern is included, similarly to the selection of the notice.

  In other words, the production mode selection unit (production control device 300) has a plurality of types of production modes according to the content information set by the content information setting unit (production control device 300). It is possible to select and execute any one of the production modes selected from among the production modes specified by the production release information (production mode release related information). Yes. In addition, the production control device 300 serves as production mode changing means that can change the production mode that can be selected by the production mode selection means based on the operation of the operation means (production button 25).

  FIG. 107 shows a display example related to the change of the effect mode. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), when the condition 1 of the model content change condition is achieved on the basis of the special result mode being derived, a notification is made that it is a big hit as shown in FIG. 107 (b). In addition, a display indicating that condition 1 of the model content change condition has been achieved is displayed. Then, a notice and a variation pattern are added from the special figure variation display game after the end of the special gaming state.

  In addition, when the condition 1 of the model content change condition is achieved based on the execution count of the special figure variation display game being a predetermined number, the special figure that achieves the condition as shown in FIG. 107 (c). When the change display game is executed and the result form of the special figure change display game is derived as shown in FIG. 107 (d), a display indicating that the condition 1 of the model content change condition has been achieved is made. And a notice and a change pattern are added from the next special figure change display game.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (e), various menus are displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (f) by operating the effect button 25 in the customer waiting state where the special figure variation display game is not executed. The menu selection screen appears. When the effect button 25 is operated in a state where this menu screen is displayed and an item for effect customization is selected and a determination operation is performed, selectable effect types are displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (g). Here, when the player performs an effect selection operation, which is an operation of selecting an effect type and performing a decision operation, effect mode release information corresponding to the effect type is set, and selectable effects and notices are changed. It is like that.

  The effect types displayed in FIG. 107 (g) are only those that can be selected by achieving the model content change condition. Here, the character A effect type 1 and the character B effect type 2 can be selected. is there. By achieving the model content change conditions? An effect type that can be selected is added to the portion displayed in (3). Here, a character A effect type 2 and a character B effect type 2 can be added.

  Note that the game parameters for changing the production mode are not limited to the above settings. For example, all the notices are counted as the total notice appearance count, but only a predetermined notice such as a notice that is likely to appear when the possibility of deriving the special result mode is high may be counted. Further, it is also possible to set the point according to the type of the notice and count the notice points that have appeared, and to set the point to a predetermined value as the model content change condition. Also, the number of notices (such as the number of pseudo-continuations) executed in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 may be counted as the number of notices. You may do it. Further, in the case of a notice that is executed by the player operating the effect button 25, the number of notices may be counted only when the notice is executed. In this way, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 25.

  In addition, although all types of big hits are counted as the total number of big hits, it may be possible to count only the predetermined big hit types, or the big hit types derived by setting points according to the big hit types The model content change condition may be that the point is counted and the point becomes a predetermined value. The types of jackpots include a probabilistic jackpot that becomes a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state, a normal jackpot that becomes the normal probability state after the end of the special gaming state, and the number of award balls that can be obtained in the special gaming state is less than usual, and is special For example, there is a chance of becoming a high probability state after the end of the gaming state, and a number of winning balls that can be acquired in the special gaming state are less than normal, and a case of entering the normal probability state after the special gaming state ends. Moreover, you may include the small hits which do not involve the action | operation of a condition apparatus. Further, the type of jackpot may be classified according to the number of rounds, the opening pattern of the special variable winning device, the probability state when it is derived, and the like.

  104 and 105 describe the configuration for adding the background change notice during the first half change, but it may be added for another notice during the first half change and the notice during the second half change. For example, an operation pattern may be added to the title notice for operating the rotating member 44a. Further, in FIGS. 104 to 106, the configuration of the first model has been described, but the second model can also be configured in the same manner. In this case, the first model and the second model may share the model content change condition, the variation pattern, and the distribution value of the notice pattern, or may be different. If only the variation pattern and the content of the notice are different between the first model and the second model, common control data can be used for setting the random number range and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  Also, the variation patterns of SP3 reach A and SP3 reach 3, which are variation patterns that can be selected only in the variation pattern selection table at the time of the big hit in FIGS. 95 (d) and (h), are increased by achieving the model content change condition. You may do it. This fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for definite notification of the big hit, and by increasing this fluctuation pattern by increasing the total number of big hits, it will be a benefit when multiple big hits are generated consecutively, Can be effectively produced.

  From the above, a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a plurality of effect modes are stored in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when the result of the game becomes a predetermined result. Possible effect mode storage means (effect control device 300), game parameter collection means (effect control device 300) for collecting game parameters which are information related to the progress of the game, and game parameters collected by the game parameter collection means Based on the information setting means (effect control device 300) for setting the effect release information capable of specifying a predetermined effect mode, and the effect mode specified by the effect release information, The production mode selection means (production control device 300) that selects and executes any of the production modes is provided.

  Here, the production mode includes an execution mode (fluctuation pattern) of a decoration game executed corresponding to the game, a display of characters and the like in the game, an operation mode of an accessory, a light emission mode such as sound and LED, a background , Customer waiting images, etc. are included.

  A conventional gaming machine has been proposed that uses a mobile terminal to identify a player and customizes the image and sound of the gaming machine for each individual player, and uses this as a means to attract customers ( For example, refer to JP2012-231921A). However, there has been a problem that it is not possible to effectively use the means of attracting customers for players who find it cumbersome to make various settings using a mobile terminal or for those who do not have a mobile terminal. . However, with the above-described configuration, the selection range of the production mode is changed based on the collected game parameters, so that the customer collection effect by the customer collection means is not limited to a specific player and can be used effectively. It becomes.

  In addition, based on the operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player and the effect mode change means that enables the change of the effect mode that can be selected by the effect mode selection means (effect control device 300) based on the operation of the operation means. The production mode specified by the production release information includes all the production modes specified by the production release information set before the change to the current production release information. The mode changing means can change the mode of presentation that can be selected by the mode of mode selection by using the mode of performance specified by each performance release information set before the change to the current performance release information. .

  Therefore, it is possible to change the selection range of the effect modes that can be executed to what the player likes. Moreover, since it changes so that the presentation aspect which can be newly selected is added with respect to the presentation aspect which was selectable, the former presentation aspect does not stop appearing and the effect of attracting customers is reduced. Can be prevented. Moreover, since it is possible to return to the selection range of the previous effect mode, it is possible to achieve an effect tailored to the player's preference.

  In addition, a variation pattern setting unit (game control device 100) that sets a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game from among a plurality of variations is provided, and the effect mode selection unit (effect control device 300) is the variation set by the variation pattern setting unit. The effect mode corresponding to the pattern is selected and executed as the game effect mode, and the effect mode specified by the effect release information includes each of the variation patterns that can be set by the variation pattern setting means. Thus, the production mode is included so that the production mode selection means can select at least one production mode. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the setting of the variation pattern even when the selectable effect mode is changed by changing the effect release information.

  In addition, a random number generation unit (production control device 300) for generating a random value for selecting the production mode is provided, and each of the plurality of production modes stored in the production mode storage unit (production control device 300) has a determination value. And the effect mode selection means (effect control device 300) obtains the random number value generated by the random number generation means when selecting the effect mode, and sets the effect mode of the determination value corresponding to the random value as the game. Random value setting means (effect control apparatus) configured to select all the determination values associated with the effect mode specified by the effect release information as random number values that can be generated by the random number generation means. 300). Therefore, since the range of the random value to be used is changed, it is not necessary to prepare a determination value table corresponding to each effect release information.

[Backup command processing]
FIG. 108 shows backup command processing (step C127) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this backup command processing, first, it is determined whether or not ACT is within the default setting range (step C225). If ACT is not within the default setting range (step C225; N), the backup command processing ends.

  If ACT is within the default setting range (step C225; Y), it is determined whether the data designated by the command has been set in the backup RAM (FeRAM 323) (step C226). In this process, it is determined by referring to the type information stored in the model information storage unit 323c2 of the FeRAM 323 whether information corresponding to the specification designated by the command is stored in the FeRAM 323.

  The specifications are settings in the game control device 100 such as jackpot probability values and distribution of variation patterns. The game control device 100 transmits a command (spec specification command) for designating a spec when the power is turned on to the effect control device 300, and initializes the control data stored in the FeRAM 323 to control data that matches the spec. Instruct. That is, the spec designation command forms a predetermined initialization instruction command, and the CPU 311 serves as a command determination unit that determines whether the predetermined initialization instruction command has been received.

  If the data designated by the command has already been set in the backup RAM (FeRAM 323) (step C226; Y), the backup command processing ends. In this case, control data matching the specifications has already been written and initialization is not necessary, and unnecessary processing of writing the same control data to the FeRAM 323 can be reduced by ending the backup command processing. If the data specified by the command has not been set in the backup RAM (FeRAM 323) (step C226; N), the data corresponding to the backup RAM (FeRAM 323) is written from the PROM 321.

  As this processing, a default setting value table corresponding to the command is set (step C227), and an initial value is saved in a predetermined area of the backup RAM based on the data in the table (step C228). Thereafter, the type information of the data set with the initial value is stored (step C229), and the backup command processing is terminated.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 109A, the data stored in the PROM 321 is read and written in the FeRAM 323. Of the data stored in the control information storage unit, distribution information initial value storage unit 321b and history information initial value storage unit 321c of the PROM 321, which data value is written to which address is the default setting value stored in the PROM 321. Stipulated in the table. The CPU 311 reads out and writes necessary data with reference to the default setting value table corresponding to the command from the game control device 100.

  For example, the CPU 311 writes the variation pattern control information stored in the control information storage unit 321a of the PROM 321 in the variation pattern control information storage unit 323a1 of the FeRAM 323. In addition, the CPU 311 writes the variation pattern selection table stored in the distribution information initial value storage unit 321b of the PROM 321 to the variation pattern distribution information storage unit 323b1 of the FeRAM 323. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the FeRAM 323 from being initialized and malfunctioning due to old control data stored in the FeRAM 323. The type information only needs to be different for each specification. For example, a table number or a checksum value of a program can be used in addition to an arbitrarily set numerical value. That is, the CPU 311 serves as initialization means for setting and initializing the control data stored in the nonvolatile ROM (PROM 321) in the control data stored in the nonvolatile RAM (FeRAM 323).

  Note that such initialization processing is mainly performed when the power is turned on for the first time when the effect control device 300 is replaced in a reuse operation of the gaming machine in the factory, or when the new effect control device 300 is attached. This is done when the power is turned on.

  In other words, the CPU 311 serves as control data writing means capable of writing control data related to a plurality of performance modes into the nonvolatile RAM (FeRAM 323). By making the control data stored in the FeRAM 323 rewritable, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to old control data stored and held in the FeRAM 323. It is also possible to change the effect mode by updating the variation pattern selection table.

  FIG. 109 (b) shows an example of commands that the game control device 100 can transmit to the effect control device 300. The power-on command is a command transmitted when the RAM 111C is initialized, and the power failure recovery command is a command transmitted when the RAM 111C is not initialized. Further, the spec designation A to C commands are spec designation commands for designating specifications to the effect control device 300, and are also initialization instruction commands for instructing to initialize control data that matches the specifications. In the game control apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, only the specification designation A command is used, and the specification designation B and C commands are not used.

  In the production control device 300, by receiving this spec designation A command, it is determined that MODE is the range of the backup command (step C126; Y), and ACT is the default setting range (step C225; Y). And the processing from step C226 to step C229 is performed. If the specification designation B and C commands are received, it is determined that ACT is not in the default setting range (step C225; N), and the processing from step C226 to step C229 is not performed.

  That is, it is determined whether a predetermined initialization instruction command (spec specification A command) is received among the initialization instruction commands (spec specification command), and the predetermined initialization instruction command (spec specification A command) is received. Initialization is possible only when Note that the PROM 321 may store control programs and control data corresponding to the specification specification A command, specification specification B command, and specification specification C command, respectively, and initialize the FeRAM 323 with data corresponding to the command. .

[Single command processing]
FIG. 110 shows the single command processing (step C123) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this single command processing, first, it is determined whether the MODE is a customer waiting demo (step C241). When it is determined that the MODE is a customer waiting demo (step C241; Y), a customer waiting demo command process (step C242) for performing processing related to the start of the customer waiting state is performed, and a single command processing is performed. finish. If it is determined that the MODE is not a customer waiting demo (step C241; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in the reserved system range (step C243).

  When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the pending system (step C243; Y), the pending command process (step C244) for storing information related to the pending is performed, and the one-shot system command process is terminated. If it is determined that the MODE is not within the reserved system range (step C243; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a power failure recovery (step C245).

  When it is determined that MODE is a power failure recovery (step C245; Y), a power failure recovery command process (step C246) for performing a process related to a power failure recovery is performed, and the one-shot command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is not a power failure recovery (step C245; N), it is determined whether MODE is RAM initialization (step C247).

  If it is determined that MODE is RAM initialization (step C247; Y), RAM initialization command processing (step C248) is performed to perform processing corresponding to power-on with RAM initialization in the game control device 100. Then, the single command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is not RAM initialization (step C247; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the probability information system range (step C249).

  When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the probability information system (step C249; Y), probability information command processing (step C250) for performing processing such as setting of effects corresponding to the probability state is performed, and the single-shot system Terminates command processing. If it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the probability information system (step C249; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the error system range (step C251).

  When it is determined that MODE is in the error range (step C251; Y), error command processing (step C252) for performing processing such as error notification is performed, and single-shot command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is not in the error range (step C251; N), the single command processing is terminated.

[RTC check processing]
FIG. 111 shows the RTC check process (step C74) in the model switching process shown in FIG. In this RTC check process, first, the RTC error counter is cleared (step C501), the RTC error flag is cleared (step C502), and it is determined whether the RTC error counter is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 4) (step C503). ).

  If the RTC error counter is not greater than the predetermined value (step C503; N), a process for acquiring the first RTC information (step C504) is performed to determine whether a communication error has occurred (step C505). Communication between the CPU 311 and the RTC 338 is configured to communicate with I2C. The CPU 311 transmits an ACK when receiving data from the RTC 338, and the RTC 338 transmits the next data when receiving an ACK from the CPU 311. It is configured. In such a configuration, the case where the next data is not transmitted from the RTC 338 even though the CPU 311 transmits ACK corresponds to the communication error. In addition, for example, when the values 1 to 7 indicate the day of the week as information indicating the day of the week, and the data received from the RTC 338 is not a value within the range of 1 to 7, the communication error also occurs.

  If a communication error has occurred (step C505; Y), the RTC error counter is updated by +1 (step C512), and the process returns to step C503. If no communication error has occurred (step C505; N), a process for acquiring second RTC information (step C506) is performed to determine whether a communication error has occurred (step C507). If a communication error has occurred (step C507; Y), the RTC error counter is updated by +1 (step C512), and the process returns to step C503. If no communication error has occurred (step C507; N), the information acquired from the RTC 338 is compared between the first time and the second time (step C508), and it is determined whether they match (step C509). Note that the minimum unit of information that can be acquired from the RTC 338 of this embodiment is a unit of second, and acquisition of information from the RTC 338 is performed at intervals sufficiently shorter than one second.

  If the information acquired from the RTC 338 does not match between the first time and the second time (step C509; N), the RTC error counter is updated by +1 (step C512), and the process returns to step C503. If the information acquired from the RTC 338 is the same for the first time and the second time (step C509; Y), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step C510). The RTC 338 monitors whether or not the voltage supplied to the RTC 338 itself has decreased, and sets a flag when the voltage decreases. Here, the CPU 311 determines whether a power failure has occurred by checking the state of the flag of the RTC 338. When the production control device 300 detects that power supply to the gaming machine has been cut off, a power failure occurrence flag is set, and whether or not a power failure has occurred is determined based on the presence or absence of this flag. Also good.

  If a power failure occurs (step C510; Y), an RTC error flag is set (step C515), and the RTC check process is terminated. If no power failure has occurred (step C510; N), the display setting of the acquired RTC information is set (step C511), and the RTC check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the RTC error counter is larger than the predetermined value (step C503; Y), it is determined whether the customer is waiting (step C513). When not waiting for a customer (step C513; N), an RTC error flag is set (step C515), and the RTC check process is terminated. If the customer is waiting (step C513; Y), the RTC error display is set (step C514), the RTC error flag is set (step C515), and the RTC check process is terminated.

  In the process of setting the display of the acquired RTC information (step C511), as shown in FIGS. 112A and 112B, the content of the date display 41a indicating the date acquired from the RTC 338 is set on the display device 41. Do. The date / time display 41a set here is displayed on the display device 41 by the power failure recovery command process (step C246) or the RAM initialization command process (step C248) of the single command processing shown in FIG. .

  FIG. 112A shows a case where RAM initialization is performed, and FIG. 112B shows a case where RAM initialization is not performed. When the RAM initialization shown in FIG. 112 (a) is performed, the model code display 41b is made in addition to the date / time display 41a. The model code display 41b shows a different model code for each model specified by the model specification command (spec specification command) transmitted from the game control device 100, and indicates the model in the model code display 41b when the power is turned on. It is possible to identify which series model the game machine corresponds to.

  Further, in the process of displaying the RTC error (step C514), as shown in FIG. 112 (c), a date / time display 41a is displayed on the display device 41 that normal information could not be acquired from the RTC. The date and time display 41a is terminated when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the start of display. Further, in the case of an RTC error, the model code display 41b is also displayed so that it can be confirmed which model is designated.

  That is, the production control device 300 serves as time information acquisition means for acquiring information generated by the time measurement means (RTC 338), and corresponds to information acquired from the time measurement means by the time information acquisition means based on power-on to the gaming machine. It serves as a time information output means for performing output. In addition, when the time information acquisition unit cannot normally acquire information from the time measuring unit, the effect control device 300 serves as a notification unit that notifies that fact.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 112 (d), these date and time displays 41a are not performed when not waiting for customers. Whether or not the customer is waiting is determined based on whether or not the command received in the power failure recovery command processing (step C246) includes information indicating that the customer is waiting (customer waiting demo command). . Restoration from a power outage when not waiting for a customer is often the case when an unintentional power outage occurs during business, and it is highly likely that a player exists, so do not display unnecessary information. The player is not distrusted. Note that the date and time display 41a may be displayed even when the customer is not waiting. Further, the date and time display 41a displays the date and time when the information is acquired from the RTC 338. However, the information is continuously acquired from the RTC 338 and the current date and time are displayed during the period when the date and time display 41a is displayed. You may do it.

  FIG. 113 shows another example of notification of information acquired from the RTC 338. In this example, audio corresponding to information acquired from the RTC 338 is output. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), when information is normally acquired from the RTC 338, sound that reads out the acquired date and time is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. As shown in FIG. 113 (b), when information cannot be normally acquired from the RTC 338, sound indicating that the information has not been acquired is output from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  In order to perform such processing, the audio output in the processing for setting the display of the acquired RTC information (step C511) and the processing for setting the display of the RTC error (step C514) in the RTC check processing shown in FIG. Is set, and the sound set in the power failure recovery command process (step C246) or the RAM initialization command process (step C248) is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. In FIG. 113, the date / time display 41a is also displayed, but it may be omitted.

  In addition, when power is supplied to a plurality of gaming machines at the same time, the voices from the plurality of gaming machines that are turned on at the same time can be matched if the voices for notifying the information of the acquired RTC 338 are simultaneously output. By confirming that the game store clerk confirms, it is possible to easily confirm that the information of the RTC 338 provided in the plurality of gaming machines is not shifted from each other. In order to do this, RTC 338 information is acquired and a sound is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. This predetermined time is sufficient to complete the processing that needs to be executed until the information of the RTC 338 is acquired. Even if there is a difference in the processing progress of each gaming machine, the same timing is used. Thus, the information of RTC 338 is acquired so that voices can be output all at once.

  In addition, it is only necessary that the store clerk of the gaming store confirms that the voices from the plurality of gaming machines match, so that the information of the RTC 338 provided in the plurality of gaming machines is not shifted from each other. The voice corresponding to the date and time acquired from the RTC 338 may be used instead of the voice that reads out all the date and time acquired from the RTC 338. For example, it may be a voice that reads out a part of the information acquired from the RTC 338, such as only the date, only the day of the week, only the time, and only the second, and includes unit information necessary for control (unit of day in the first embodiment). It is preferable to make it. Moreover, it is good also as the audio | voice selected according to the date and time instead of reading out the date and time itself.

  FIG. 114 also shows another example of notification of information acquired from the RTC 338. In this example, an image corresponding to information acquired from the RTC 338 is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 114A to 114D, when information is normally acquired from the RTC 338, an image corresponding to the acquired date is displayed. This image is different depending on the acquired date and time. FIG. 114 (a) is an image corresponding to 14: 9: 36 on June 15, 2015, and FIG. 114 (b) is an image corresponding to June 2015. It is an image corresponding to 14: 9: 37 on the 15th. FIG. 114 (c) is an image corresponding to 14: 9: 38 on June 15, 2015, and FIG. 114 (d) is an image corresponding to 14: 9: 39 on June 15, 2015. is there.

  If information cannot be acquired normally from the RTC 338, an image corresponding to the case where information cannot be acquired normally is displayed as shown in FIG. In FIG. 114, the date / time display 41a is also displayed, but it may be omitted. In addition, the image illustrated in FIG. 114 is an example, and any image may be used as long as the date and time acquired from the RTC 338 can be visually recognized as being different from each other or information not being normally acquired from the RTC 338.

  By displaying an image corresponding to the acquired RTC 338 information, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information of the RTC 338 of a plurality of gaming machines is identical. Note that corresponding images may be sequentially displayed in accordance with changes in the current time so that the information of the RTC 338 can be confirmed according to the image change mode.

  Thus, in order to be able to confirm whether or not the information of the RTC 338 of a plurality of gaming machines is coincident with each other, when the plurality of gaming machines are simultaneously turned on, the plurality of gaming machines At the same time, information on the RTC 338 is acquired, and an image for informing the acquired information is output. Therefore, information of the RTC 338 is acquired and an image is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. This predetermined time is sufficient to complete the processing that needs to be executed until the information of the RTC 338 is acquired. Even if there is a difference in the processing progress of each gaming machine, the same timing is used. To obtain information on the RTC 338.

  Also, if the store clerk confirms that the images displayed on the plurality of gaming machines match, it can be confirmed that the information of the RTC 338 provided in the plurality of gaming machines is not shifted from each other. In addition, the image may be an image set based on some unit values of information acquired from the RTC 338, instead of an image set based on all unit values of information acquired from the RTC 338. For example, it may be an image corresponding to a part of information acquired from the RTC 338 such as date only, day of the week only, time only, or only second, and information on a unit necessary for control (unit of day in the first embodiment) may be used. It is preferable to include it.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 114 (f), images corresponding to the unit values of date and time may be displayed in different areas. Here, an image corresponding to the year is displayed on the left of the upper row, an image corresponding to the moon is displayed on the center of the upper row, and an image corresponding to the day is displayed on the right of the upper row. Furthermore, an image corresponding to the hour is displayed on the left in the lower row, an image corresponding to the minute is displayed in the center of the lower row, and an image corresponding to the second is displayed on the right in the lower row. By doing so, it is possible to grasp which unit value is shifted when compared with a plurality of gaming machines.

  In addition to display and voice notification, the information acquired from the RTC 338 may be displayed according to the lighting state of the lamp or LED, or the information acquired from the RTC 338 is output to a device outside the gaming machine such as a hall computer. You may make it do. When the information acquired from the RTC 338 is output to a device external to the gaming machine, the external device may determine and notify the deviation of the RTC 338 or the abnormality of the RTC 338 of a plurality of gaming machines. In addition, the date and time is managed by an external device, and date and time information is transmitted from the external device to the gaming machine. Each gaming machine corrects its own RTC 338 based on the date and time information received from the external device. You may make it do. In addition, each gaming machine may be provided with a radio clock that can receive the standard radio wave and grasp the time, and the RTC 338 may be corrected based on the time of the radio clock, or a radio clock may be provided instead of the RTC 338. good. Further, the gaming machines can communicate with each other, and the RTC 338 of each gaming machine may be synchronized, or a plurality of gaming machines may be controlled using the date and time of one RTC 338.

[Advance notice lottery process]
FIG. 115 shows the advance notice lottery process in the first half change notice lottery process shown in FIG. 101 and the latter half change notice lottery process shown in FIG. In this advance notice detail lottery process, first, it is determined whether the selected advance notice group is a title advance notice (step C521). The title notice is a notice effect performed by operating the rotating member 44a.

  If the selected notice group is not a title notice (step C521; N), a corresponding notice selection table is set (step C525), and the process proceeds to step C526. If the selected notice group is a title notice (step C521; Y), it is determined whether there is a model switching completed flag (step C522).

  The model switching completed flag is a flag that is set when the model is switched based on reaching a predetermined date and time in the model switching process shown in FIG. When there is no model switching completed flag (step C522; N), the title notice 1 selection table is set (step C523), and the process proceeds to step C526. If there is a model switching completed flag (step C522; Y), the title notice 2 selection table is set (step C524), and the process proceeds to step C526.

  After setting the corresponding notice selection table based on the presence of the notice group and the model switching completed flag selected as described above, the notice is selected based on the set notice selection table and random number (step C526). Then, the selected notice is set (step C527), and the notice detail lottery process is terminated. The production control device 300 controls the display on the display device 41, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the lighting mode of the lamps and LEDs, and the operation of the rotating member 44a based on the contents set in this way. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production operation control means for controlling the operation of the production operation device (the board production device 44).

  Here, as for the title notice, if there is no model switching completed flag, only the first model whose model name is “ABC” is disclosed, and therefore it is the second model name that has not yet been disclosed in the title notice 1 selection table. Only the title notice for operating the rotating member 44a can be selected in such a range that the side on which the characters “Iroha” are written is not visible to the player.

  As such an operation, the first model name “ABC” which is the first model name or the first model name “ABC” which is swung in a state in which the side surface on which the characters “ABC” are described is visible to the player. From the state in which the player can visually recognize the side surface on which the character is written, an operation of rotating the side surface on which the character “CHANCE” is written is visible to the player. Of course, when the side surface with the characters “CHANCE” is rotated so as to be visible to the player, the side with the characters “ABC” as the first model name is visible to the player. In such a case, the side surface on which the characters “Iroha”, which is the second model name, is set as the rotation direction in which the player cannot visually recognize the side surface.

  If there is a model switching completed flag, all the models that can be set in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be released, so the title notice 2 selection table sets various operations that do not limit the rotation direction or rotation range. It is possible. For example, an operation of rotating the rotating member 44a once is also possible.

  In addition, although the operation mode of the rotating member 44a is set based on the presence / absence of the model switching completed flag set based on the information from the RTC 338 acquired in the model switching process shown in FIG. 92, the operation mode of the rotating member 44a is set. Each time setting is performed, information on the RTC 338 may be acquired to set the operation mode.

  Further, the operation mode of the rotating member 44a may be set in more detail based on the information of the RTC 338. For example, the types and number of operation modes that can be selected depending on the date and time may be varied. In addition, the display modes of the display device 41 and the display modes such as lamps, LEDs, and voices may be set in more detail based on the information of the RTC 338.

  As described above, information indicating the current date and time in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a predetermined result. Clocking means (RTC 338), clocking information acquisition means (production control device 300) for acquiring information generated by the clocking means, and clocking information acquisition means acquired from the clocking means based on power-on to the gaming machine Timekeeping information output means (production control device 300) for performing output corresponding to the information is provided.

  Here, the output corresponding to the information acquired from the time measuring means includes sound, display on a display device, display by a lamp or LED, output to a device outside the gaming machine, and the like.

  Therefore, since output corresponding to information acquired from the time measuring means (real time clock) is performed based on power-on, it is easy to confirm the date and time information managed by the time measuring means.

  In addition, a display device 41 capable of displaying an effect display relating to the game is provided, and the time information output means displays a display corresponding to the information acquired from the time information by the time information acquisition means on the display device. .

  Accordingly, since the display corresponding to the information acquired from the time measuring means is performed when the power is turned on, the date information managed by the time measuring means can be easily confirmed.

  In addition, speakers 19a and 19b capable of outputting sounds related to games are provided, and the time information output unit outputs sound corresponding to the information acquired from the time unit by the time information acquisition unit.

  Therefore, since the sound corresponding to the information acquired from the time measuring means is output when the power is turned on, it is easy to check the date and time information managed by the time measuring means.

  In addition, in a gaming machine that is capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a predetermined result, an effect operation device operable by a drive source (Rotating member 44a), production operation control means (production control apparatus 300) for controlling the operation of the production operation apparatus, time measurement means (RTC 338) for generating information indicating the current date and time, and information generated by the time measurement means. A time information acquisition means (effect control device 300) to be acquired, and the effect operation control means can set the operation mode of the effect operation device based on the information acquired by the time information acquisition means.

  Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect capable of obtaining a further effect of attracting customers that is differentiated from other gaming machines.

  The content information setting means (effect control device 300) for setting usable content information from among a plurality of pieces of content information defining a game effect mode is provided, and the content information setting means is acquired by the time information acquisition means. The production information device is configured to increase usable content information every time the information fulfilled a predetermined condition, and the presentation operation device has a plurality of display surfaces, and the plurality of display surfaces are associated with the content information. Each display surface can be made visible sequentially by being included and operated, and only one display surface is visible in the stopped state. The operation mode is set so that the display surface corresponding to the content information other than the usable content information set by the setting means is not visible. The it has to be constant.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the content of the content that has not been used yet being disclosed. In particular, it is possible to seal characters and designs of an object that the player does not want to be released unless a specific date and time are reached, and it is possible to keep the player interested until a specific date and time.

  In addition, when the time information acquisition unit cannot normally acquire information from the time measurement unit, the time information acquisition unit includes a notification unit that notifies that fact. Therefore, it is possible to easily find a defect in management of content information.

[First Modification]
Next, the gaming machine of the first modification will be described. In addition, it has the structure similar to the game machine of the above-mentioned embodiment fundamentally, about the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the initialization process of the FeRAM 323.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 116 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this main process, when the ID data (unique information) in the control ROM (PROM 321) and the backup ID data (unique information) stored in the FeRAM 323 do not match (step C9; N), the backup RAM (FeRAM 323) In place of the process of clearing all the contents of, the process of clearing the contents of the backup RAM excluding the hall setting value data, the presentation mode release related information and the model switching setting information (step C281) is performed.

  Thereby, even if the FeRAM 323 is initialized, the hall setting value data, the presentation mode release related information, and the model switching setting information are not initialized, and only control data necessary for preventing malfunction can be initialized. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to reset the hall setting value data and the model switching setting information. Further, it is possible to prevent the entertainment selection range set by the game results so far from being returned to the initial state and the player's interest is reduced. Note that when the FeRAM 323 is initialized, the data to be left without being initialized may be selected by operating the operating means.

  As described above, the nonvolatile ROM (PROM 321) stores a plurality of effect modes as control data, and the arithmetic processing means (CPU 311) allows the effect release information that can specify a predetermined effect mode from the plurality of effect modes. Is selected every time a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the information setting means (CPU 311) for storing in the nonvolatile RAM (FeRAM 323) and the effect mode specified by the effect release information are selected as the game effect mode. And the execution mode selection means (CPU 311) to be executed, and the determination means (CPU 311) determines that the unique information stored in the nonvolatile ROM and the unique information stored in the nonvolatile RAM do not match. In the case, the initialization means (CPU 311) initializes the control data and the unique information, while the effect release information (effect mode) is initialized. Release related information) can be assumed to be to hold without initializing.

  Even if the unique information stored in the nonvolatile ROM and the unique information stored in the nonvolatile RAM do not match, the effect release information stored in the RAM remains so that the effect release information is initialized. It is possible to prevent the entertainment selection range from returning to the initial state and reducing the interest of the player.

[Second Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification will be described. In addition, it has the structure similar to the game machine of the above-mentioned embodiment fundamentally, about the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted. The gaming machine according to the present modification can use model switching as an effect.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 117 shows the jackpot command process (step C119) in the received command analysis process described above. In this jackpot command processing, it is first determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C291). And when MODE is a fanfare (step C291; Y), the big hit start screen information is set (step C292), the prefetch information corresponding to the held start memory is acquired (step C293), and acquired. It is determined whether there is jackpot information in the pre-read information (step C294).

  If there is no jackpot information in the acquired prefetch information (step C294; N), that is, if all the special figure variation display games based on the current start memory are out of place, the jackpot command processing is terminated. In addition, when the acquired prefetch information includes jackpot information (step C294; N), that is, when a special result is derived in the special figure variation display game based on the current start memory, the special result is continuous in a short time. The continuous channel flag indicating that the error occurs is set (step C295).

  Thereafter, the value of the model content setting area is acquired (step C296), and it is determined whether the model content information is 1 (step C297). When the model content information is 1 (step C297; Y), 2 is set as the setting value of the sound information (step S298), and the big hit command processing is terminated. If the model content information is not 1 (2) (step C297; N), 1 is set as the setting value of the sound information (step S299), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. Thus, when there is a start memory that has a special result in the start memory existing when the special game state occurs, the sound in the special game state becomes a sound of a model different from the current model. In other words, it is possible to notify the player of the existence of the start memory that has a special result by a change in sound.

  If MODE is not a fanfare (step C291; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (step C300). If MODE is an interval (step C300; Y), the round number display information is updated (step C301), and the jackpot command processing ends. If MODE is not an interval (step C300; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C302).

  When MODE is not ending (step C302; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated. If MODE is an ending (step C302; Y), screen information corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot is set (step C303). For example, when the high probability state is entered after the special gaming state is finished, screen information for notifying that the high probability state is set is set.

  Next, it is determined whether there is a continuous channel flag (step C304). If there is no continuous channel flag (step C304; N), the big hit command processing is terminated. If there is a continuous channel flag (step C304; Y), the continuous channel flag is cleared (step C305), a model switching determination random number is acquired (step C306), and the acquired model switching determination random number is the model number. It is determined whether the value is a switching value (step C307).

  If the acquired model switching decision random number is a model switching value (step C307; Y), the value set in the sound information is set in the model content setting area (step C308), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. Thereby, it is switched to a model different from the model set before the occurrence of the special gaming state. If the acquired model switching determination random number is not the model switching value (step C307; N), the value set in the model content setting area is set in the sound information (step C309), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. . As a result, the model set before the occurrence of the special gaming state is maintained, and the sound is returned to that model. That is, if there is a start memory that has a special result in the start memory that exists when the special game state occurs, the sound in the special game state is a sound of a model different from the current model, but with a predetermined probability The model after the end of the special game state can be switched to a model that uses voice in the special game state.

[Model change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the model switching process shown in FIG. 118 is performed instead of the model switching process shown in FIG. In this model switching process, first, it is determined whether or not the date and time has been confirmed based on the presence or absence of the switching date and time confirmed flag (step C72). If the date and time have been confirmed (step C72; Y), the model switching process is terminated. If the date / time has not been confirmed (step C72; N), the switching date / time confirmed flag is set (step C73). The switching date / time confirmation flag is a process of saving the initial value at the time of power-on in the area to be initialized in the main process (step C7) so that the switching date / time is confirmed only once after the gaming machine is turned on. The initial value is cleared when it is saved.

  Thereafter, an RTC check process for acquiring date / time information from the RTC 338 is performed (step C74), and it is determined whether there is an RTC error flag that is set when the information cannot be normally acquired from the RTC 338 in the RTC check process (step C74). C75). If there is this RTC error flag (step C75; Y), the model switching process is terminated. If there is no RTC error flag (step C75; N), it is determined whether there is a model switching date and time setting that defines the model switching date and time (step C76).

  If there is no model switching date and time setting (step C76; N), the model switching process is terminated. If there is a model switching date / time setting (step C76; Y), date / time information is read from the RTC (step C77), and model switching date / time information is acquired (step C311).

  Then, the value of the model content setting area is acquired (step C312), and it is checked whether the model content setting area and the model content information set in the model switching date / time information match (step C313). As described above, the model may be switched when triggered by the special gaming state, and therefore it is determined whether the model currently set by this switching is the model set based on the model switching date and time information.

  If the model content setting area and the model content information set in the model switching date and time information match (step C314; Y), the model switching process is terminated because there is no need to switch the model here. If the model content information set in the model content setting area and the model switching date / time information do not match (step C314; N), various settings for switching to the model content corresponding to the model switching date / time information are performed (step C315). ), The model switching process is terminated.

  That is, the model can be switched based on the model switching date / time information, and the model based on the model switching date / time information is set when the power is turned on. Here, if it is before the date and time specified in the model switching date and time information, the first model is set when the power is turned on, and if it is before the date and time specified in the model switching date and time information, the second model is set when the power is turned on. The model is set. As described above, by setting the model based on the model switching date / time information when the power is turned on, the effect of attracting customers due to the model switching based on the model switching date / time information can be maintained even if the presentation is performed by switching the model.

  FIG. 119 shows changes in the setting values of the content information and the model switching setting information of each effect mode when the starting memory existing at the time of occurrence of the special gaming state includes a starting memory that is a special result. FIG. 119 (a) is an example in which the model after the end of the special gaming state is changed. Before the occurrence of the special gaming state, 1 is set as the model content information and the first model is set, and the setting value of the model switching setting information of each production mode is also set to 1 corresponding to the first model. ing.

  When the special result is derived and the special gaming state is started (t1), the set value of the sound information is changed to 2 corresponding to the second model different from the first model. As a result, only the voice is changed to the voice of the second model during the special gaming state, and the player can recognize that there is a starting memory that has a special result during the starting memory. Thereafter, when the special gaming state ends (t2), 2 corresponding to the second model set in the sound information is set as the setting value of the model content information and the model switching setting information of each production mode, The model becomes the second model.

  The setting values of the model content information and the model switching setting information of each production mode are stored in the FeRAM 323, and the information is maintained even if the gaming machine is turned off (from t3 to t4). Then, when the power is turned on (t4), the model is set based on the model switching date / time information. Here, since it is the period for setting the first model, the setting value of the model content information and the model switching setting information of each effect mode is changed to 1 corresponding to the first model.

  FIG. 119 (b) shows an example in which the model after the end of the special gaming state is not changed. Until the end of the special gaming state, it is the same as FIG. 119 (a). Then, when the special gaming state ends (t12), the set value of the sound information is returned to 1 corresponding to the first model, and becomes the first model even after the special gaming state ends.

  In this state, the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off (t13), and in setting the model based on the model switching date and time information at the time of turning on the power (t14), here is the period for setting the first model. The setting value of the content information and the model switching setting information of each effect mode is maintained as 1 corresponding to the first model. As described above, by switching the model other than the switching based on the model switching date and time information, it is possible to perform an effective presentation in a gaming machine capable of setting a plurality of types of models.

  In the advance notice lottery process shown in FIG. 115, the operation mode of the rotating member 44a is set depending on the presence / absence of the model switching completed flag. However, in this modification, the operation mode is set with reference to model content information. . When the model content information is 1, the title notice 1 selection table is set, and when the model content information is 2, the title notice 2 selection table is set. In the above description, it is possible to set a voice that does not correspond to the model content information. However, the same control may be possible for the title notice, and if the model content information is 1, the model content information for the title notice may be set. The operation mode in the case of 2 may be settable.

  From the above, in the gaming machine capable of executing a special game state advantageous to the player when the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result, Content information setting means (effect control device 300) capable of setting any one of a plurality of content information to be defined, and effect mode storage means (effect control device 300) for storing a plurality of types of effect modes as game effect modes. ) And production mode setting means (production control device 300) for setting a production mode that can be selected from a plurality of types of production modes according to the content information set by the content information setting unit. The setting means can execute an effect mode that does not correspond to the set content information based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

  Further, based on the winning at the starting opening (start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37), a predetermined random number is extracted, and a starting winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as starting storage as a right to execute the variable display game (Game control device 100) and pre-determination means for determining a random number stored as start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start memory, The predetermined condition is that the start memory stored when the special result is derived is determined by the pre-determination means to determine that there is a start memory that is a special result.

  In addition, the content information setting means (the effect control device 300), when the effect mode setting means (the effect control device 300) executes an effect mode that does not correspond to the set content information in the special game state, the special game state. As the content information after ending, content information corresponding to the executed effect mode can be set.

  In addition, the information processing device includes a clock unit (production control device 300) that can generate information indicating the current date and time, and the content information setting unit (production control device 300) counts time when the power is turned on regardless of the set content information. Content information is set based on the information indicated by.

[Third Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification will be described. In addition, it has the structure similar to the game machine of the above-mentioned embodiment fundamentally, about the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted. The gaming machine of this modification includes the date and time in the model content change condition.

[Direction mode management processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, an effect mode management process shown in FIG. 120 is performed instead of the effect mode management process shown in FIG. In this effect mode management process, after performing the process from step C201 to C210, the date and time information of the RTC is read (step C321), and it is determined whether it is the specific release period (step C322). If it is the specific release period (step C322; Y), a release state corresponding to the date / time information is set (step C323).

  FIG. 121 shows conditions for changing the presentation mode release related information. In the gaming machine of this modification, business hours are included in the model content change condition, and in the case of the character A performance mode shown in FIG. 121 (a), the time forms a specific release period from 10:00 to 11:00, 14 When the time is from 15:00 to 15:00 and from 18:00 to 19:00, an executable variation pattern or a notice is set assuming that the condition 5 of the model content change condition is achieved.

  In the case of the character B effect mode shown in FIG. 121 (b), if the time is from 10 o'clock to 11 o'clock, 14 o'clock to 15 o'clock, and 18 o'clock to 19 o'clock that make a specific release period, the model content is changed. A change pattern and a notice that can be executed as condition 6 of the condition is achieved are set. By doing in this way, a change pattern and a notice can be varied according to time, and it can be set as an effective means for attracting customers. In addition, when changing patterns and notices are added based on the number of days since the introduction, various fluctuation patterns and notices can be shown even if the number of days since the introduction has not passed. Can do.

  In addition, when the condition more than the model content change condition that is achieved by reaching the specific release period has already been achieved, the executable variation pattern and notice are not changed even during the specific release period. In addition, after the specific release period ends, the executable fluctuation pattern and notice will return to the state before the start of the specific release period, but if the model content change condition is newly achieved by the game during the specific release period, Executable variation patterns and notices are set according to the achieved conditions.

  Further, the player may be able to select whether to add a variation pattern or a notice in the specific release period. Further, a plurality of types may be provided in the specific release period, and the variation pattern and the notice that are added may be different depending on the type. For example, a morning period, a noon period, an evening period, and a night period may be provided in the specific release period, and a variation pattern and a notice added in each period may be set individually. Further, in the night period, it may be possible to select addition of a variation pattern or a notice added in another period. In addition, a predetermined model content change condition is not achieved in the specific release period, but a variation pattern or a notice that can be executed only in the specific release period may be set.

  As for the title notice, when the model content information is 1, the operation when the model content information is 2 in the specific opening period may be performed. By doing in this way, it is possible to give a prior notice of the model that is scheduled to be released later, and it can be a motivation for coming to the store at a later date. In this case, it is possible to set such an operation from a predetermined date before an undisclosed model is released so that the undisclosed model is not known.

  The gaming machine 10 as described above is a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a predetermined result. Content information setting means (effect control device 300) that can set any one of a plurality of pieces of content information that defines a game effect mode, and an effect mode storage unit that stores a plurality of types of effect modes as game effect modes. (Production control device 300), production mode setting means (production control device 300) for setting a production mode that can be selected from a plurality of types of production modes according to the content information set by the content information setting unit, Timekeeping means (production control device 300) capable of generating information indicating the current date and time, and production mode change time storage means capable of storing information indicating the date and time when content information is changed Effect control device 300), content information change determination means (effect control device 300) for determining whether or not to change the content information based on information indicated by the timing means and the effect mode change storage means, and the content information change Content information changing means (production control device 300) that changes the set content information to different content information when the determination means determines that the content information is to be changed.

  Here, the game effect mode includes an execution mode (fluctuation pattern) of a decoration game executed corresponding to the game, a display of characters and the like during the game, an operating mode of an accessory, a light emission mode such as sound and LED, etc. , Backgrounds, waiting images, etc.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of attracting customers from fading over time and to generate new attracting means.

  Further, a variation pattern setting means (game control device 100) for setting a variation pattern as a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations, and an effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern set by the variation pattern setting means are represented as an effect mode setting means ( An effect mode selection means (effect control device 300) for selecting from among a plurality of effect modes set by the effect control device 300), and the effect mode setting means can be selected according to the content information. As described above, the production mode is set so that at least one production mode can be selected for each of all the variation patterns that can be set by the variation pattern setting means.

  Therefore, it is not necessary to change the setting of the variation pattern even when changing the content information to change the selectable presentation mode.

  In addition, a display device 41 that displays a game is provided, and the game is a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a variable manner and then stops and displays identification information corresponding to the result. The identification information setting means (production control device 300) for setting a plurality of pieces of identification information according to the content information set by the above and a plurality of pieces of identification information set by the identification information setting means as default identification information. Information display means (production control device 300) for displaying on the display device 41 when the power is turned on as identification information, and the information display means displays the identification information corresponding to the content information set in the content information setting means as the default identification information. It is trying to display as.

  Therefore, the set content information can be confirmed by confirming the default identification information displayed when the power is turned on.

Second Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described.

  FIG. 122 shows a front view of the game board 30 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, an effect operation device 900 that forms the board effect device 44 is provided in the lower part of the center case 40. As will be described later, the effect operating device 900 includes a rotating member 910 including a rectangular cylindrical rotating member main body 920 and a drive source (stepping motor 955) for operating the rotating member 910, and a shaft extending in the left-right direction. As a result, the side surface of the rotating member 910 that can be visually recognized by the player can be changed.

  Below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game and a second start win giving a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game. A winning device 98 having a mouth 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) is provided. The winning device 98 includes a distribution mechanism that alternately distributes the game balls flowing into the upper inflow port 99 to the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97. A game ball won in the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a, and a game ball won in the second start winning opening 97 is detected by the start opening 2 switch 37a. It should be noted that the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 99 may always be awarded at any start winning opening, or may be discharged outside the winning device 98 without winning. .

  The normal symbol start gate (ordinary diagram start gate) 34 is provided on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. In addition to the second start winning opening 97 provided in the winning apparatus 98, a normal variable winning apparatus (a start winning opening, a start winning area) having a second start winning opening (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game ( 37) is provided on the lower right side of the center case 40. This normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b only on the right side, and can be converted into a closed state in which the movable member 37b is substantially vertical and an open state inclined to the right. Further, the normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a partition wall 37d for restricting the inflow of game balls on the left side portion facing the movable member 37b. The partition wall 37d prevents the game ball from flowing into the normal variation winning device 37 when the movable member 37b is closed. A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a.

  Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, a first special variable winning device (first big prize opening, lower large size) which can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure display game. (Winning opening) 38 is arranged. The second special variable winning device 39 is not provided, and the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the special game state regardless of the type of the special result. Of course, a second special variable winning device may be provided.

  Next, the detailed structure of the center case 40 will be described with reference to FIG. The center case 40 includes a front structural member 600 (front decoration unit) disposed in front of a flat gaming board body 30c made of an opaque material (for example, wood) or a transparent material (for example, a transparent resin), and a gaming board body. A central constituent member (central decoration unit) 700 disposed behind the front constituent member 600 and a rear constituent member (control unit) 800 disposed behind the central constituent member 700. FIG. 123 shows an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the game board 30.

  The front component member 600 includes a base frame member 602 formed in a frame shape so as to form an opening 601 penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is configured by attaching various members to the base frame member 602. The base frame member 602 is inserted into an opening 30b that passes through the front and rear formed in the game board main body 30c, and extends outward at a front end of the peripheral wall 603 perpendicular to the peripheral wall 603. Plate-shaped (flange-shaped) front wall 604 formed as described above, and a decorative armor that is formed so as to protrude forward of the front wall 604 and restricts the inflow of game balls from the game area 32 to the opening 601 side Part 605 (entry restriction part).

  The outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 603 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the opening 30b when the front constituent member 600 is inserted into the opening 30b formed in the game board main body 30c from the front side. Accordingly, the front structural member 600 is arranged at predetermined vertical and horizontal positions with respect to the game board main body 30c. In addition, the portion of the front wall 604 that is formed outside the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 603 is not affected when the front component member 600 is inserted from the front side into the opening 30b formed in the game board main body 30c. The back surface of the game board main body 30c is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 30c. Thus, the front structural member 600 is arranged at a predetermined front and rear position with respect to the game board main body 30c. In addition, a plurality of screw holes are formed in this portion, and the front structural member 600 can be fixed to the game board main body 30c with screws.

  Furthermore, a part of the front wall 604 is arranged on the front side of the game board main body 30c and is visible to the player, and the front is decorated. In addition, the front wall 604 is formed with other screw holes, screwing portions, positioning bosses, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, and the like so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. It has become.

  The decorative armor portion 605 is formed so as to surround the opening 601. This decorative armor portion 605 is more forward than the front wall 604 by the front and rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front surface of the game board main body 30c to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). It is supposed to extend to. Therefore, by attaching the front structural member 600 to a predetermined position of the game board main body 30c, the decorative armor portion 605 positioned in front of the front wall 604 extends into the game area 32, and a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is obtained. Inflow to the opening 601 side is regulated. Thereby, the visibility of the display device 41 can be ensured and the number of game balls flowing into the stage 621 can be limited. That is, the area surrounded by the decorative armor portion 605 that is the inside of the base frame member 602 forms an entry restriction area where entry of game balls is restricted.

  Similarly to the decorative armor portion 605, a decorative portion 607 extending forward from the front wall 604 by the front and rear width of the game area 32 is formed at the lower right portion of the base frame member 602. Between the decorative armor portion 605 and the decorative armor portion 605, an inter-decoration portion flow passage 608 is formed through which the game ball flowing down the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 flows down.

  A first movable accessory 609 a and a second movable accessory 609 b that form the board effect device 44 are provided at positions above the base frame member 602 and adjacent to the opening 601. The first movable accessory 609a and the second movable accessory 609b can move up and down, respectively, and as shown in FIG. Is operable.

  A warp device 610 provided on the left side of the base frame member 602 has an inlet 611 that opens to the left for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40, and flows into the inlet 611. The game ball having a cylindrical warp channel for guiding the game ball to the stage is guided to the left end of the stage 621.

  The stage 621 is formed by the upper surface of the stage member 620 attached to the base frame member 602. The stage 621 has a predetermined front-rear width that allows the game ball to roll, and has an inclined surface in which both the left and right sides descend toward the center, and a central portion disposed directly above the winning device 98 faces upward. It is formed in a protruding substantially W shape. The center portion of the stage 621 protrudes upward, but is lower than the left and right ends. In the stage 621 formed in a substantially W shape, an inclined surface that is lowered forward is formed at the lowest portion located on both sides of the center portion protruding upward. Due to this inclined surface, the game ball whose flow down has weakened on the stage 621 flows down to the game area 32.

  In addition, an inclined surface that guides the game ball toward the rear is formed in a portion that protrudes upward in the stage 621 formed in a substantially W shape. The game ball on the stage 621 rolls to the left and right without falling on the inclined surface when the momentum to roll to the left and right is strong, but the game ball that has fallen on the inclined surface because the momentum has just weakened in this part is guided backwards Is done. The game ball guided backward by the inclined surface is guided directly above the inlet 99 of the winning device 98 through a passage portion 624 having an inner diameter through which the game ball formed at the lower portion of the stage 621 can pass. It has become.

  The central component member 700 includes a base member 702 that includes a cylindrical portion 710 that is formed in a cylindrical shape so as to form an opening 701 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The base member 702 is formed with a plurality of screw holes, bosses and the like for attaching the central component member 700 to the back surface component member 800. The central component member 700 is attached to the game board main body 30c via the back surface component member 800. It can be attached. A decorative member 711 is disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the tubular portion 710. In addition, an effect operation device 900 is provided at a lower portion of the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 710.

  The back surface component member 800 includes a rear base member 810 having a recessed chamber that opens forward. In the concave chamber of the rear base member, the above-described central component member 700 and a discharge ball channel member for detecting and discharging game balls won in various winning holes are arranged. Further, a display control unit 820 including a display device 41 is disposed behind the rear base member 810, and the display unit of the display device 41 is opened from a window portion 811 formed on the rear wall of the concave chamber of the rear base member 810. It is designed to be visible. Further, an attachment portion 812 for attaching to the back surface of the game board main body 30c is formed at the front end portion of the rear base member 810. A plurality of screw holes are formed in the mounting portion 812, and the back surface component member 800 can be fixed to the back surface of the game board main body 30c with screws.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the effect operation device 900 has a configuration in which both ends of a rotating member 910 including a rotating member main body 920 having a square cylindrical shape are rotatably supported by a first support portion 950 and a second support portion 960. ing. As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, a rear cover member 721 is disposed behind the effect operation device 900, and a side cover member 722 is disposed on the left and right of the effect operation device 900. Only the side facing the person side is made visible. Since the effect operation device 900 is arranged below the display device 41, the side surface of the rotating member 910 facing diagonally forward is the surface facing the player side. Hereinafter, the direction facing the player side is referred to as a display direction. In FIGS. 122 to 125, the side surface (first side surface 921) to which the plate labeled “ABC” is attached faces the display direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 124 and 125, the rotating member 910 includes a rectangular cylindrical rotating member main body 920, and a first supported portion 930 and a second supported portion 940 attached to both side ends of the rotating member main body 920. Prepare. The rotating member main body 920 displays information on the game on each of the four side surfaces. As will be described later, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes four types of content having different game contents such as effects and display contents. Plates displaying names corresponding to respective contents are attached to the first side surface 921, the second side surface 922, the third side surface 923, and the fourth side surface 924, which are four side surfaces arranged in the circumferential direction. Then, control is performed so that the side surface to which the plate displaying the name corresponding to the currently set content is attached faces the display direction.

  The first side surface 921, the second side surface 922, the third side surface 923, and the fourth side surface 924 are counterclockwise when viewed from the left end when viewed from the player side in a state in which the effect operation device 900 is attached to the game board 30. When the rotating member 910 is rotated in the rotation direction (forward rotation direction), the display direction is directed in the order of the first side surface 921, the second side surface 922, the third side surface 923, and the fourth side surface 924. Here, the plate 1 labeled “ABC” is attached to the first side 921, the plate 2 labeled “Iroha” is attached to the second side 922, and the plate 3 labeled “Aiu” is attached to the first side 922. A plate 4 attached to the third side surface 923 and labeled “XYZ” is attached to the fourth side surface 924.

  A light emitting device 970 including a plurality of LEDs is inserted inside the rectangular cylindrical rotating member main body 920. The light emitting device 970 has a placement position and a size that do not come into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the rotating member main body 920 even when the rotating member 910 rotates, and the surface on which the LEDs are provided faces the display direction. The first support portion 950 and the second support portion 960 are supported. The rotating member main body 920 is made of a material that can transmit light, and the plate attached to each side surface is also made of a material that can transmit light, and can be decorated by transmitting light from the light emitting device 970.

  The first supported portion 930 is attached to a position that is the left end of the rotating member main body 920 when viewed from the player side in a state where the effect operation device 900 is attached to the game board 30. The first supported portion 930 includes a fixing portion 934 for fixing to the end portion of the rotating member main body 920, and a circular cylindrical shape extending to the side opposite to the side fixed to the rotating member main body 920 (left side). 1st to-be-fitted part 935 is provided. In addition, the central axis orthogonal to the radial direction of the circular cylindrical first fitted portion 935 coincides with the central axis parallel to the length direction of the rectangular cylindrical rotating member main body 920.

  The first fitted portion 935 is a gear having a plurality of teeth 936 formed on the outer peripheral surface, and meshes with a gear 956 that is driven by a stepping motor 955 serving as a drive source. The rotary member 910 can be driven to rotate. In addition, the light emitting device 970 is disposed so that one end of the light emitting device 970 passes through the space inside the first fitted portion 935 formed in a circular cylindrical shape.

  Furthermore, a plurality of plate-shaped light shielding plates 931, 932, and 933 for detecting the state of the rotating member 910 by the first motor switch sensor 952 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the first fitted portion 935. Each light shielding plate 931, 932, 933 is provided so that the plate surface is along one plane perpendicular to the central axis of the first fitted portion 935 formed in a circular cylindrical shape.

  The arrangement positions of the light shielding plates 931, 932, and 933 are as shown in FIGS. 127 (a) and (g), for example. A first light shielding plate 931 is provided at a position adjacent to the third side surface 923 over a predetermined width along the circumferential direction centering on a position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the third side surface 923. Further, a second light shielding plate 932 is provided at a position adjacent to the fourth side surface 924 over a predetermined width along the circumferential direction centering on a position corresponding to the center of the fourth side surface 924 in the width direction. Further, a third light shielding plate 933 is provided at a position adjacent to the first side surface 921 over a predetermined width along the circumferential direction centering on a position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the first side surface 921.

  The first light shielding plate 931 and the second light shielding plate 932 are formed as a single plate, but the third light shielding plate 933 has a slit over a certain width at a position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the first side surface 921. It is formed and has a shape divided into two with the slit interposed therebetween. In addition, each of the light shielding plates 931, 932, and 933 has a symmetrical shape with an axis along the radial direction passing through a position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the adjacent side surfaces as a center.

  As shown in FIGS. 124 and 125, the second supported portion 940 is attached to a position that is the right end of the rotating member main body 920 when viewed from the player side in a state where the effect operation device 900 is attached to the game board 30. The second supported portion 940 is a circular cylindrical shape that extends to the opposite side (left side) of the fixing portion 944 for fixing to the end of the rotating member main body 920 and the side fixed to the rotating member main body 920. 2nd to-be-fitted part 945 is provided. The central axis perpendicular to the radial direction of the second cylindrical fitting portion 945 is configured to coincide with the central axis parallel to the length direction of the rectangular cylindrical rotating member main body 920. Further, the other end portion of the light emitting device 970 is disposed in the space inside the circular tubular second fitted portion 945 so as to penetrate therethrough.

  Furthermore, a plurality of plate-shaped light shielding plates 941, 942, 943 for detecting the state of the rotating member 910 by the second motor switch sensor 962 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the second fitted portion 945. Each of the light shielding plates 941, 942, 943 is provided such that the plate surface is located on one plane perpendicular to the central axis of the second fitted portion 945 formed in a circular cylindrical shape.

  The arrangement positions of the light shielding plates 941, 942, 943 are as shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and (d). A fourth light shielding plate 941 is provided at a position adjacent to the third side surface 923 over a predetermined width along the circumferential direction centering on a position corresponding to the center of the third side surface 923 in the width direction. Further, a fifth light shielding plate 942 is provided at a position adjacent to the fourth side surface 924 over a predetermined width along the circumferential direction centering on a position corresponding to the center of the fourth side surface 924 in the width direction. Further, a sixth light shielding plate 943 is provided at a position adjacent to the second side surface 922 over a predetermined width along the circumferential direction centering on a position corresponding to the center of the second side surface 922 in the width direction.

  The fourth light-shielding plate 941 and the fifth light-shielding plate 942 have a single plate shape, but the sixth light-shielding plate 943 has a slit over a certain width at a position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the second side surface 922. It is formed and has a shape divided into two with the slit interposed therebetween. In addition, each of the light shielding plates 941, 942, 943 has a symmetrical shape with an axis along the radial direction passing through a position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the adjacent side surfaces as a center.

  As shown in FIGS. 124 and 125, the first support portion 950 has a circular cylindrical first fitting that fits inside a circular cylindrical first fitted portion 935 provided in the first supported portion 930. A joint portion 951 is provided. In a state where the first fitting portion 951 and the first fitted portion 935 are fitted, a central axis orthogonal to the radial direction of the first fitting portion 951 and a radial direction of the first fitted portion 935 are orthogonal. The center axis to be matched. In addition, the outer diameter of the first fitting portion 951 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the first fitting portion 935, and the first fitting portion 951 is centered on the central axis with respect to the first fitting portion 951. The part 935 is rotatable.

  A light emitting device fixing portion 957 for fixing one end portion of the light emitting device 970 is provided inside the first fitting portion 951 formed in a circular cylindrical shape. The light emitting device fixing portion 957 is provided with a connector 958 for connecting wiring for causing the light emitting device 970 to emit light. The connector 958 is provided at the end of the light emitting device 970 on the first support portion 950 side. A connector (not shown) is connected.

  Further, the first support portion 950 is provided with a sensor attachment portion 953 for attaching a first motor switch sensor 952 for detecting the state of the rotating member 910. The first motor switch sensor 952 attached to the sensor attachment portion 953 is an optical sensor in which the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval, and detects light from the light emitting portion in the light receiving portion. Thus, an ON signal is output. By attaching the first motor switch sensor 952 to the sensor attachment portion 953, each light shielding plate 931, 932, 933 formed on the first supported portion 930 with the rotation of the rotating member 910 causes the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. The first motor switch sensor 952 is arranged so as to pass through.

  Further, the first support portion 950 is formed with a motor attachment portion 954 for attaching a stepping motor 955 serving as a drive source. The gear 956 driven by the stepping motor 955 attached here meshes with a plurality of teeth 936 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the first fitted portion 935 provided in the first supported portion 930, and the stepping motor 955. The rotating member 910 can be rotated by the driving force.

  The second support portion 960 includes a circular cylindrical second fitting portion 961 that fits inside a circular cylindrical second fitted portion 945 provided in the second supported portion 940. In a state where the second fitting portion 961 and the second fitted portion 945 are fitted, a central axis perpendicular to the radial direction of the second fitting portion 961 and a radial direction of the second fitted portion 945 are orthogonal. The center axis to be matched. Further, the outer diameter of the second fitting portion 961 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second fitted portion 945, and the second fitted portion 961 is centered on the central axis with respect to the second fitting portion 961. The part 945 is rotatable.

  A light emitting device fixing portion 967 for fixing one end of the light emitting device 970 is provided inside the second fitting portion 961 formed in a circular cylindrical shape. The other end portion of the light emitting device 970 inserted through the second fitting portion 961 is fixed to the light emitting device fixing portion 967 with a screw.

  The second support portion 960 is provided with a sensor attachment portion 963 for attaching a second motor switch sensor 962 for detecting the state of the rotating member 910. Similar to the first motor switch sensor 952, the second motor switch sensor 962 attached to the sensor attachment portion 963 is an optical sensor in which a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval. In this case, an ON signal is output by detecting light from the light emitting unit. By attaching the second motor switch sensor 962 to the sensor attachment portion 963, each light shielding plate 941, 942, 943 formed on the second supported portion 940 with the rotation of the rotating member 910 causes the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. The second motor switch sensor 962 is arranged so as to pass through.

  The first support part 950 and the second support part 960 are fixed to the central component member 700. As a result, the rotating member 910 is supported in a state of being rotatable about the central axis along the left-right direction of the game board 30. The light emitting device 970 is supported by the first support portion 950 and the second support portion 960 in a state where the surface on which the LED is provided faces the display direction. Even if the rotating member 910 rotates, the light emitting device 970 does not rotate, and the surface on which the LEDs are arranged always faces the display direction.

  The effect control device 300 performs the rotation control of the rotating member 910 and the light emission control of the light emitting device 970. FIG. 126 shows a process of change due to the rotation of the rotating member 910. As shown in FIG. 126 (a), the first side surface 921 to which the plate 1 labeled “ABC” is attached is rotated 90 degrees in the forward direction from the state in which the first side surface 921 faces the display direction. As shown in b), the second side surface 922 to which the plate 2 labeled “Iroha” is attached changes to a state in which it faces the display direction.

  Furthermore, by rotating 90 degrees in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 126 (b), the third side surface 923 to which the plate 3 labeled “Ai” is attached is displayed as shown in FIG. 126 (c). It changes to a state of facing. In addition, by rotating 90 degrees in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 126 (c), the fourth side surface 924 attached with the plate 4 labeled “XYZ” is displayed as shown in FIG. 126 (d). It changes to a state of facing. Then, by rotating 90 degrees in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 126 (d), the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) is restored. Of course, it can also rotate in the reverse direction opposite to the normal direction.

  In the effect control device 300, the state of the rotating member 910 rotating in this way is grasped based on the control information of the stepping motor 955 and information from the first motor switch sensor 952 and the second motor switch sensor 962, and the rotating member 910 is obtained. The rotation is controlled.

  FIG. 127 shows the state of the rotating member 910 at each of the states shown in FIGS. 126A to 126D at the left end and the right end as viewed from the player side. First, the state at the left end in the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) is shown in FIG. 127 (a), and the state at the right end is shown in FIG. 127 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 127 (a), at the left end portion of the rotating member 910, none of the light shielding plates 931, 932, 933 is at the position of the first motor switch sensor 952, and the first motor switch sensor 952 is in a light-transmitting state (ON State). The light shielding plate that can be seen at the position of the first motor switch sensor 952 is the sixth light shielding plate 943 at the right end of the first light shielding sensor 952, and is not detected by the first motor switch sensor 952. The first light shielding plate 931 is hidden by a gear 956. As shown in FIG. 127 (b), at the right end portion of the rotating member 910, the fourth light shielding plate 941 is at the position of the second motor switch sensor 962, and the second motor switch sensor 962 is in a light shielding state (OFF state). Yes.

  Next, the state at the left end in the state shown in FIG. 126 (b) is shown in FIG. 127 (c), and the state at the right end is shown in FIG. 127 (d). As shown in FIG. 127 (c), at the left end portion of the rotating member 910, the first light shielding plate 931 is at the position of the first motor switch sensor 952, and the first motor switch sensor 952 is in a light shielding state. The second light shielding plate 932 is hidden by a gear 956. As shown in FIG. 127 (d), at the right end of the rotating member 910, the fifth light shielding plate 942 is positioned at the second motor switch sensor 962, and the second motor switch sensor 962 is in a light shielding state.

  Next, the state at the left end in the state shown in FIG. 126 (c) is shown in FIG. 127 (e), and the state at the right end is shown in FIG. 127 (f). As shown in FIG. 127 (e), at the left end of the rotating member 910, the second light shielding plate 932 is at the position of the first motor switch sensor 952, and the first motor switch sensor 952 is in a light shielding state. The third light shielding plate 933 is hidden by a gear 956. Also, as shown in FIG. 127 (f), at the right end of the rotating member 910, none of the light shielding plates 941, 942, 943 is located at the position of the second motor switch sensor 962, and the second motor switch sensor 962 is in a light-transmitting state. It has become. The light shielding plate that can be seen at the position of the second motor switch sensor 962 is the third light shielding plate 933 at the opposite left end, and is not detected by the second motor switch sensor 962.

  Next, the state at the left end in the state shown in FIG. 126 (d) is shown in FIG. 127 (g), and the state at the right end is shown in FIG. 127 (h). As shown in FIG. 127 (g), the third light shielding plate 933 is at the position of the first motor switch sensor 952 at the left end of the rotating member 910. Since the third light shielding plate 933 is formed with a slit, the first motor switch sensor 952 is in a light-transmitting state. Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (h), the sixth light shielding plate 943 is located at the position of the second motor switch sensor 962 at the right end of the rotating member 910. Since the sixth light shielding plate 943 has a slit, the second motor switch sensor 962 is in a light-transmitting state.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 128, for each display plate that is a plate corresponding to the currently set content, the first motor switch sensor 952 and the second motor switch when the display plate faces the display direction. The state of sensor 962 is defined. When the display plate is the plate 1 displayed as “ABC”, if the plate 1 faces the display direction, the first motor switch sensor state which is the detection state by the first motor switch sensor 952 is the light passing state. Thus, the second motor switch sensor state, which is the state detected by the second motor switch sensor 962, is a light shielding state.

  In addition, when the display plate is the plate 2 displayed as “Iroha”, the first motor switch sensor state and the second motor switch sensor state are in a light-shielding state if the plate 2 faces the display direction. Further, when the display plate is the plate 3 displaying “Ai”, the first motor switch sensor state is a light-shielding state and the second motor switch sensor state is a light-transmitting state if the plate 3 faces the display direction. It becomes. Further, when the display plate is the plate 4 displayed as “XYZ”, if the plate 4 faces the display direction, the first motor switch sensor state and the second motor switch sensor state are light-transmitting states. It becomes.

  Thereby, about the case where a display plate is plates 1-3, it can grasp | ascertain whether the said display plate has faced the display direction from the 1st motor switch sensor state and the 2nd motor switch sensor state. In addition, since the shading plate has a certain width along the circumferential direction, a slight deviation from the display direction cannot be detected, but if this deviation is such, other plates will not be visible to the player. So no problem. Further, the deviation from the display direction is corrected by performing the sensing operation described below.

  In the case where the display plate is the plate 4, the first motor switch sensor state and the second motor switch sensor state are in a light-transmitting state even when the plate 4 does not face the display direction depending on the rotation angle of the rotating member 910. Therefore, it is impossible to grasp whether the display direction is oriented only from the first motor switch sensor state and the second motor switch sensor state. However, the state can be grasped by combining the sensing operations described below.

  Next, a sensing operation for causing the display plate, which is a plate corresponding to the currently set content, to face the display direction will be described. This sensing operation is performed, for example, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when content is changed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 128, it is also performed when the origin check condition set for each display plate is met, that is, when it is detected that the display plate is not facing the display direction.

  In this sensing operation, plate alignment processing is first performed. In this plate alignment process, the rotating member 910 is rotated in the forward direction, the first motor switch sensor 952 detects the change shown in the “first motor switch sensing” column, and the second motor switch sensor 962 “ From the time when the change shown in the column of “second motor switch sensing” is detected (hereinafter referred to as sensing time), the motor rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined number of steps (predetermined angle) and stops. Since the light shielding plate has a predetermined width along the circumferential direction from a position corresponding to the center in the width direction on the side surface of the rotating member main body 920, the predetermined number of steps according to the half width of the light shielding plate from the sensing time point. By rotating only in the normal rotation direction, one of the plates faces the display direction.

  After the plate alignment process, a check process is performed to determine whether the display plate is facing the display direction. In this check process, it is determined whether the first motor switch sensor state and the second motor switch sensor state are states when the display plate faces the display direction at the time of stop. And when it is in the state where the display plate faces the display direction, the sensing operation is terminated.

  If the display plate is not in the display direction, re-rotation processing is performed. When the display plate is the plate 2 or the plate 4, since the change at the time of sensing is the same, it can be confirmed which plate is facing the display direction by the check process. Then, when a plate different from the display plate is facing the display direction, re-rotation processing is performed.

  In the re-rotation process, the rotation member 910 is rotated in the forward rotation direction by a certain number of steps. The number of steps at this time is such that the light shielding plate at the position of the first motor switch sensor 952 or the second motor switch sensor 962 moves away from the position of the first motor switch sensor 952 or the second motor switch sensor 962, and in the circumferential direction. The number of steps is such that the adjacent light shielding plate does not reach the position of the first motor switch sensor 952 or the second motor switch sensor 962. After performing the re-rotation process, the plate alignment process and the check process are performed.

  When the first motor switch sensor state and the second motor switch sensor state do not become the state when the display plate faces the display direction even if the re-rotation process, the plate alignment process and the check process loop are performed a predetermined number of times. Then, error processing is performed on the assumption that some abnormality has occurred. In the error process, the operation of the effect operation device 900 is stopped and a notification indicating the occurrence of an error is given by the LED of the game board 30 or the display device 41. Further, information notifying the occurrence of an error may be transmitted to the outside. However, since the game can be executed even if there is an abnormality in the effect operation device 900, it is preferable that the error notification does not affect the game.

  In the plate alignment process and the re-rotation process, the rotating member 910 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, but may be rotated in the reverse direction. Further, after performing the plate alignment process and the re-rotation process in the normal rotation direction, the plate alignment process and the re-rotation process may be performed again in the reverse direction. By performing the sensing operation in this way, it is possible to prevent a plate other than the plate to be shown to the player from being seen due to the displacement of the rotating member 910.

  Next, processing for changing content will be described. The gaming machine of the present embodiment has four types of contents with different game contents such as effects and display contents, and the game progresses along one content selected and set from these. . The contents can be changed by an operation of a store clerk at an amusement store.

[Model change processing]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the model switching process shown in FIG. 129 is performed instead of the model switching process shown in FIG. In this model switching process, if there is an RTC error flag (step C75; Y), a model switched flag corresponding to all model contents is set (step C431), and the model switching process is terminated. In this case, all models are released, so that the player is not disadvantaged due to the malfunction of RTC338. If there is no RTC error flag (step C75; N), after performing the processes of steps C76 to C79, the model switching completed flag corresponding to the set model content is set (step C432), and the model switching process is performed. finish.

  The model-switched flag corresponding to the set model content is a flag indicating whether or not the contents “ABC”, “Iroha”, “Ai”, and “XYZ” have been published. By referring to the model-switched flag, for example, in the title notice that operates the rotating member 910, it is possible to set the operation so that the plate corresponding to the content that has not yet been released is not visible to the player. It becomes.

  From the above, a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when a game results in a predetermined result, the game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player can be operated by a driving source. A production operation device (rotating member 44a), production operation control means (production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the production operation device, time measuring means (RTC 338) for generating information indicating the current date and time, and time generation means Time information acquisition means (effect control device 300) for acquiring information to be performed, and the effect operation control means can set the operation mode of the effect operation device based on the information acquired by the time information acquisition means. Content information setting means (production control device 300) for setting usable content information from among a plurality of pieces of content information defining the production mode is provided. The setting means is configured to increase usable content information every time the information acquired by the timing information acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition, and the rendering operation device has a display surface corresponding to each of the plurality of content information. In addition, each display surface can be sequentially viewed by operating, and only one display surface can be viewed in the stopped state. The production operation control means is configured by the content information setting means. The operation mode is set so that the display surface corresponding to the content information other than the set usable content information is not visible, and the content information setting means is configured so that the time information acquisition means normally receives information from the time measurement means. If it cannot be obtained, all content information can be used.

  Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect capable of obtaining a further effect of attracting customers that is differentiated from other gaming machines. In addition, it is possible to prevent the content of content that is not yet available from being disclosed. Further, even if there is a malfunction in the time measuring means, it is possible to execute the game without causing any disadvantage to the player.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the hall / player setting mode process shown in FIG. 130 is performed instead of the hall / player setting mode process shown in FIG. In the hall / player setting mode process, the content release process (step C401) is performed in the hole setting mode.

[Content release processing]
FIG. 131 shows the content release processing (step C401) in the hall / player setting mode processing shown in FIG. In this content release processing, first, it is determined whether or not content switching is in progress (step C411). Note that content switching is a mode as shown in FIG. 132 (d) in which content switching is possible. When this content switching is in progress, a content switching flag is set and the presence / absence of this flag. Thus, it can be determined whether the content is being switched.

  If the content is being switched (step C411; Y), the process proceeds to step C416. If the content is not being switched (step C411; N), it is determined whether there is an input of a release password necessary for setting the mode in which the content can be switched (step C412). If no release password has been input (step C412; N), the content release process ends. If there is an input of the release password (step C412; Y), the release password data in the FeRAM 323 is compared with the input release password data (step C413).

  If the release password data does not match (step C414; N), the content release process is terminated. If the release password data match (step C414; Y), a content switching flag is set (step C415). As a result, a mode in which contents can be switched is set. Next, it is determined whether there is a content switching operation input that is an operation for selecting desired content from a plurality of contents (step C416).

  If there is no content switching operation input (step C416; N), the content release processing is terminated. If there is a content switching operation input (step C416; Y), content information corresponding to the content switching operation is provisionally set (step C417), and a content confirmation operation input that is an operation for setting the selected content is performed. It is determined whether there is any (step C418).

  Then, when there is no content confirmation operation input (step C418; N), the content release processing is terminated. If there is a content confirmation operation input (step C418; Y), the temporarily set content information is set as confirmed content information (step C419). As a result, new content is set. Thereafter, the content switching flag is cleared (step C420), the model switched flag corresponding to the set model content is set (step C421), and the content release processing is terminated. The set confirmed content information and the model-switched flag are written to the backup RAM (FeRAM 323) by the process of step C43, and are retained even if the power of the gaming machine is cut off. That is, here, a predetermined content information change condition is established by the match of the release password data and the content confirmation operation input, and the content is changed.

  The effect control device 300 performs a process of changing game contents such as effects and display contents as the contents change. The PROM 321 shown in FIG. 88 stores data for each of four types of contents having different game contents such as effects and display contents. When there is a change in content, the data corresponding to the newly selected content is written to the FeRAM 323 after erasing the data corresponding to the previous content from the FeRAM 323, and control is performed based on the newly written data. Do. Thereby, game contents such as effects and display contents are changed. Data corresponding to the set content may be used among the data corresponding to each content stored in the PROM 321 without writing the data corresponding to the set content in the FeRAM 323.

  The game contents to be changed include display on the display device 41, sound, decoration LED lighting mode, reach effect content and selection probability, prefetch effect execution mode, notice, effect mode content, effect by the rotating member 910 An aspect etc. are mentioned. In addition, since the control content in the game control device 100 is not changed, the jackpot probability, the selection ratio of the variation time, and the like do not change. Of course, the control content in the game control apparatus 100 may be changed.

  In addition, the production control device 300 changes the display plate in the production operation device 900 according to the confirmed content information based on the setting of the confirmed content information. Then, control is performed to rotate the rotating member 910 so that the display plate faces the display direction. In addition, by performing a sensing operation in accordance with the change in content, it is possible to prevent a plate other than the plate to be shown to the player from being seen due to the displacement of the rotating member 910, and content that has not yet been released can be prevented. It can be prevented from being disclosed. In addition, when performing a title advance notice by operating the rotating member 910, an operating range of the rotating member 910 is set such that a plate corresponding to a content that has not yet been disclosed is not disclosed.

  In addition, referring to the model-switched flag in the sensing operation performed when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the content is changed, a plate corresponding to the content that has not been disclosed is not disclosed if possible. The sensing operation may be performed by the operation of the rotating member 910. Especially when a gaming machine is restarted due to a power outage or malfunction during business hours, there is a high possibility that a player is present, so it has not been released with reference to the model switch completed flag It is preferable to perform the sensing operation by the operation of the rotating member 910 so that the plate corresponding to the content is not disclosed. Alternatively, the sensing operation itself may not be performed. Whether or not it is during business hours can be determined based on whether or not the business time is stored in advance in the gaming machine and the time information managed by the RTC 338 matches the stored business time.

  FIG. 132 shows an example of a screen displayed on the display device 41 in an operation related to content change. When the hole setting mode is started, a screen as shown in FIG. 132 (a) is displayed. On this screen, items that can be changed such as volume, LED brightness, and content setting are listed, and the current setting is displayed. Here, “B” “CR Iroha” is set as the content.

  By operating the effect button 25 in this state, a moving operation for moving the cursor is possible, and a confirming operation for proceeding to a setting change of the item where the cursor is positioned is possible. The cursor here is highlighted so as to surround the item name whose setting can be changed. In FIG. 132A, the cursor is positioned at the volume setting item.

  FIG. 132 (c) shows a case where the moving operation by the effect button 25 is performed from the state of FIG. 132 (a), and the cursor is moved to the content setting item and the confirmation operation is performed as shown in FIG. 132 (b). The unlock password entry screen is displayed. In this screen, the character is selected by moving the cursor for selecting the character to the desired character by the moving operation by the effect button 25 and performing the confirming operation, and this is repeated to input the release password. To do.

  If the input release password matches the release password data in the FeRAM 323, the content can be switched and a screen for changing the content setting is displayed as shown in FIG. Here, the contents A to D can be selected by the moving operation (content switching operation) by the effect button 25 in the content setting item, and the content information of the selected content is temporarily set for each moving operation. Is done. The selected content is set by performing a confirmation operation (content confirmation operation) using the effect button 25, and the content information provisionally set based on the confirmation operation is set as the confirmed content information. Note that the screen returns to the screen shown in FIG. 132A based on the confirmation operation.

  By making the content changeable as described above, it is possible to execute an effect capable of obtaining a further effect of attracting customers that is differentiated from other gaming machines. In addition, it becomes possible to switch to a completely different content model by entering the release password, for example, the content that can be set for each amusement store can be changed, and there is no means for attracting customers, which is not found in other gaming machines. It can be realized. Further, the production operation device 900 can be operated according to the set content, and the set content can be clearly notified.

  That is, the effect control device 300 (PROM 321 or FeRAM 323) serves as an effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, different models of effect modes) as game effect modes. In addition, the production control device 300 (CPU 311) serves as content information setting means that can set any one of a plurality of pieces of content information that defines a game production aspect, and content information set by the content information setting means. Accordingly, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode that can be selected from a plurality of types of effect modes is provided. Further, the effect control device 300 (CPU 311) serves as content information changing means for changing the set content information to different content information based on the establishment of a predetermined content information change condition.

  In addition, the production control device 300 (FeRAM 323) serves as password data storage means for storing password data for release required when changing the content information. In addition, the effect control device 300 serves as a coincidence determination unit that determines whether or not the password data for release coincides with the password data input by a predetermined operator. Further, the gaming machine 10 can be operated by a drive source (stepping motor 955) and includes an effect operation device in which a normal state is set corresponding to a plurality of pieces of content information. In addition, the production control device 300 serves as production operation control means for controlling the operation of the production operation device in response to the content information set in the content information setting means.

  Note that the release password data in the FeRAM 323 may be written in the FeRAM 323 as initial information stored in the PROM 321 shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the release password data stored as the initial information in the history information initial value storage unit 321c of the PROM 321 based on the reception of the specification designation command from the game control device 100 is changed to FeRAM 323. Is written in the hole setting information storage unit 323c1 of the history information storage unit 323c.

  Also, different release password data may be set for each content, and the content corresponding to the input release password data may be selected. In this case, the content may be changed by satisfying a predetermined content information change condition only by matching the release password data. Further, the content may be arbitrarily changed without inputting the release password data. In this case, a predetermined content information change condition is satisfied only by the content confirmation operation input, and the content is changed.

[Advance notice lottery process]
Further, the detailed notice lottery process shown in FIG. 133 is performed instead of the detailed notice lottery process shown in FIG. In the advance notice lottery process, when the selected advance notice group is a title advance notice for operating the rotating member 910 (step C521; Y), the set model change completed flag is acquired (step C531) and set. The title notice selection table is set according to the model switching completed flag (step C532), and the process proceeds to step C526.

  The model-switched flag indicates information on the published content. By referring to the flag, the title notice in which only the operation of the rotating member 910 is set so that the plate corresponding to the content that has not been disclosed is disclosed. A selection table is set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the disclosure of the plate corresponding to the content that has not yet been disclosed in the title notice. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production operation control means for controlling the operation of the production operation device (rotating member 910).

  In addition, when the selected notice group is an object notice for operating the first movable accessory 609a and the second movable accessory 609b, the operation mode may be selected with reference to the information of the RTC 338. good. For example, a first period indicating that the degree of expectation with a special result is higher when the second movable accessory 609b operates than when the first movable accessory 609a operates, and the second movable accessory 609b A second period indicating that the degree of expectation with a special result is higher when the first movable accessory 609a operates than when operating, and selects any period based on the information of the RTC 338 To. By doing in this way, even if it is the same accessory, since an expectation changes with periods, the interest of a game can be improved.

  Further, the selectable contents may be limited based on the information of the RTC 338. For example, it may be possible to select a specific content based on a certain date on the calendar or when a certain period of time has passed since installation in a game store. Furthermore, when the contents that can be selected are limited based on the information of the RTC 338, the contents that are not yet selectable may be notified.

  As an announcement, for example, a digest movie of content that is not yet selectable is displayed on the display device 41 every predetermined time (for example, one hour), and then a game with content that can be selected next as a trial version is displayed. You may make it possible for a predetermined period (for example, 20 games). Further, the player may be able to select whether or not to play the trial version game. By making such a notification, it is possible to have a willingness to visit the game store again in order to play a game with contents that can be selected next. In particular, if the number of days until the next new content can be selected is notified, it is possible to more clearly have a willingness to visit the amusement store. In addition, the title that rotates the rotating member 910 may be notified of the content that can be selected in the future by including an operation in which the plate corresponding to the content that is not yet selectable is visible.

  Further, the content may be changed based on the player's selection. For example, any content can be selected from the currently selectable content based on operating the effect button 25 while waiting for a customer. Further, the content may be changed based on a predetermined condition established in the game. In these cases, the sensing operation of the rendering operation device 900 may not be performed when the content is changed, and content that has not yet been disclosed may not be disclosed.

  In addition, the execution mode of the notice effect may be selected even for the same content. For example, a mode in which no notice effect is performed, a mode in which a notice by sound or light or a change in the identification information is given, a mode in which a single notice effect that gives a definite notification of a big hit occurs frequently The player may be able to select from a plurality of modes. In this way, a variety of gaming can be given to one gaming machine by combining content changes and mode changes.

  In particular, if the content that can be selected is the content that corresponds to the past model, the current game machine that can carry out the production contents of the model of the time as it is, and can execute new effects that did not exist in the model of the time By making it possible to select a mode close to the production of the game machine, it can be a gaming machine that can be accepted by a wide range of generations. In addition to enabling the presence / absence of an effect to be selected as a mode as a mode, the player may be able to set the presence / absence of execution of an individual effect (such as a pre-reading effect or a single announcement effect).

  Further, the content may be changed based on the player selecting the effect button 25 even when the customer is not waiting. In this case, the change may be made at any timing during the game.

  In the conventional gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 134 (a), the change of the effect mode based on the operation of the operation unit such as the effect button 25 is effective only during a predetermined period (for example, t11 to t12) during the variable display. In many other periods during display (for example, t12 to t13), during a stop time (for example, t13 to t14), during a special game state, etc., the effect mode cannot be changed based on the operation of the operation unit. Because of these restrictions, the period during which the production mode can be changed by operating the operation unit is short, especially when the fluctuation time is short, even though it is difficult to change or the operation unit is operated The player may be dissatisfied because the operation period has passed and the operation is not reflected.

  In order to solve such a problem, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), the content (effect mode) may be changed by operating the effect button 25 forming the operation unit at any timing during the game. Of course, the content may be changed by operating the effect button 25 even in the special game state. In such a case, there is a problem when a content effect such as a reach effect is executed, but if the content is changed during the reach effect, the reach effect of the changed content is You may make it perform, and you may make it make it the effect | action corresponding to the content after a change only the part which does not have big influence on the content of reach effects, such as a background. Further, the content may not be changed only during the execution of the effect depending on the content, or may be accepted as a change reservation and changed to the corresponding content after the reach effect is finished.

  In addition, not only the change of the content (production mode) based on the operation of the operation unit, but also other processes based on the operation of the operation unit may be performed at any timing during the game. For example, the player setting mode in which the player can refer to the setting of the gaming machine and history information is started by operating the effect button 25 while waiting for the customer. The player setting mode may be started even during the gaming state. In this case, the player setting mode may be displayed on the entire display device 41, or the player setting mode may be displayed on a part of the display device 41, and the remaining part may display a game such as a variable display. May be.

[First Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, it has the structure similar to the game machine of the above-mentioned 2nd Embodiment fundamentally, about the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted. The gaming machine of this modification is configured not to cause an RTC error if information necessary for control can be acquired from the RTC 338.

[RTC check processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the RTC check process shown in FIG. 135 is performed instead of the RTC check process shown in FIG. In this RTC check process, when the information acquired from the RTC 338 is the same in the first time and the second time (step C509; Y), it is determined whether the information necessary for control is valid (step C541). If the information necessary for the control is valid (step C541; Y), the process proceeds to step C510. If the information necessary for the control is not valid (step C541; N), the process proceeds to step C512.

  In the case of the game machine of this variation having the configuration of the second embodiment, the information necessary for control is the release of content in units of days, so the date information is necessary for control. Information. If the date information can be acquired, even if the hour / minute / second information cannot be normally acquired, an RTC error is not generated. For example, in the third modification of the first embodiment, the specific release period is set according to the time (see FIG. 121). In this case, in addition to the date information necessary for releasing the content, the specific release period The information for the time required for the setting is the information necessary for control. Therefore, even if the second information cannot be acquired normally, no RTC error occurs. In addition, you may make it alert | report that some information was not able to be acquired normally.

  In the determination of whether or not there is a communication error in this modification (steps C505 and C509), if no data is transmitted from the RTC 338, a communication error is determined. However, if some data is transmitted, the RTC 338 If the data received from is not a value within the predetermined range, no communication error is assumed. For example, when the values 1 to 7 indicate the day of the week as the information indicating the day of the week, and the data received from the RTC 338 is not a value within the range of 1 to 7, a communication error does not occur and is necessary for control. In determining whether the information is valid (step C541), based on the fact that the day of the week data is not valid, the RTC error counter is updated if this data is necessary for control. Process as follows.

  From the above, the content information setting means has acquired the information normally when the time information acquisition means has acquired all the information necessary for the control even if the time information acquisition means has not been able to acquire all the information normally. It will be that.

[Second Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, it has the structure similar to the game machine of the above-mentioned 2nd Embodiment fundamentally, about the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted. The gaming machine according to the present modification stores information acquired from the RTC 338 when the power is turned on in a predetermined period.

[RTC check processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the RTC check process shown in FIG. 136 is performed instead of the RTC check process shown in FIG. In this RTC check process, after setting the display of the acquired RTC information, it is determined whether the time is within a predetermined period (step C551). When the time is within the predetermined period (step C551; Y), the RTC check process is terminated. If the time is not within the predetermined period (step C551; N), the acquired RTC information is saved as power-on time information (step C552), and the RTC check process is terminated.

  Here, the predetermined period is the business hours of the game store, and the time when the power is turned on before the business start of the game store is stored. In addition, when the power is turned on while the game shop is in operation, the time is not stored and the stored power-on time information is maintained. The power-on time information is stored in the FeRAM 323, and the process of saving the initial value at power-on (step C7) in the area to be initialized in the main process shown in FIG. It is out of scope and is retained even when power supply is cut off. It should be noted that the time range within the predetermined period can be arbitrarily set at the game shop or manufacturer by a separate setting process.

[Simultaneous production processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the simultaneous effect process shown in FIG. 137 is performed in the loop process of steps C14 to C27 in the main process shown in FIG. This simultaneous effect process is a setting for a simultaneous effect in which a plurality of gaming machines that are turned on at the same time perform the same effect all at once based on the elapse of a predetermined time since the power is turned on.

  In this simultaneous effect process, first, it is determined whether there is power-on time information (step C561). If there is no power-on time information (step C561; N), the simultaneous effect process is terminated. In this case, the elapsed time since the power is turned on is unknown, and a simultaneous effect synchronized with other gaming machines cannot be executed. Therefore, the simultaneous effect is not performed.

  If there is power-on time information (step C561; Y), power-on time information is acquired (step C562), RTC information is acquired (step C563), and the elapsed time from the time of power-on time information Time is calculated (step C564). And simultaneous production time information which is the information of the elapsed time from the power-on which becomes the timing for performing the simultaneous production is acquired, and the elapsed time calculated in step C564 is the simultaneous production timing that matches the time acquired in step C565. Is determined (step C566).

  If it is not the simultaneous effect timing (step C566; N), the simultaneous effect process is terminated. If it is the simultaneous production timing (step C566; Y), the simultaneous production is set (step C567), and the simultaneous production process is ended.

  In this way, by determining whether it is the simultaneous production timing from the power-on time information stored by power-on before business hours and the information of RTC 338, due to a malfunction of the gaming machine during business hours Even when restarting, it is possible to execute a simultaneous performance synchronized with other gaming machines.

  From the above, even in a state where the power supply to the game machine and the simultaneous effect control means (effect control device 300) that performs a predetermined simultaneous effect based on the elapse of a predetermined time since the power is turned on are stopped. A memory holding means (FeRAM 323) capable of holding data, and a time measuring means (RTC 338) for generating information indicating the current date and time. The time acquired from the time measuring means is stored in the memory holding means as the power on time information, and the time from the power on is calculated from the power on time information and the current time obtained from the time measuring means. Thus, simultaneous production is performed based on the fact that the calculated time becomes the predetermined time.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  Further, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 19a, 19b speaker 41 display device 300 production control device (time information acquisition means, time information output means)
338 RTC (timer)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and can execute a special game advantageous to a player when the result of the game becomes a predetermined result,
A timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time;
Timing information acquisition means for acquiring information generated by the timing means;
A gaming machine, comprising: a timing information output unit that performs output corresponding to information acquired from the timing unit based on power-on to the gaming machine. Provided with a display device capable of displaying the effect display related to the game
The timekeeping information output means includes
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the time information acquisition unit displays a display corresponding to the information acquired from the time measurement unit on the display device. It has a speaker that can output audio related to gaming,
The timekeeping information output means includes
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the time information acquisition unit outputs a sound corresponding to the information acquired from the time unit from the speaker.

Images